blob: 641316105c017ae3439feded3dce0f1d20a3048e [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001//===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===//
2//
3// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00007//
8//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9//
10// This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for
Gordon Henriksen829046b2008-05-08 17:46:35 +000011// SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's
12// basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000013//
14//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
15
Quentin Colombeta3490842014-02-22 00:07:45 +000016#include "llvm/CodeGen/Passes.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruth62d42152015-01-15 02:16:27 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h"
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth219b89b2014-03-04 11:01:28 +000023#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000024#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
25#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
26#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Chandler Carruth5ad5f152014-01-13 09:26:24 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Chandler Carruth03eb0de2014-03-04 10:40:04 +000029#include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000030#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +000034#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000035#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h"
Chandler Carruth4220e9c2014-03-04 11:17:44 +000037#include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
Chandler Carrutha4ea2692014-03-04 11:26:31 +000038#include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h"
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000039#include "llvm/Pass.h"
Evan Cheng8b637b12010-08-17 01:34:49 +000040#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +000041#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000042#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000043#include "llvm/Target/TargetLowering.h"
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +000044#include "llvm/Target/TargetSubtargetInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
46#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BuildLibCalls.h"
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +000049#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h"
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000050using namespace llvm;
Chris Lattnerd616ef52008-11-25 04:42:10 +000051using namespace llvm::PatternMatch;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000052
Chandler Carruth1b9dde02014-04-22 02:02:50 +000053#define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare"
54
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000055STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000056STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim, "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated");
57STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim, "Number of GEPs converted to casts");
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000058STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of "
59 "sunken Cmps");
60STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses "
61 "of sunken Casts");
62STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address "
63 "computations were sunk");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000064STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved, "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads");
65STATISTIC(NumExtUses, "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized");
66STATISTIC(NumRetsDup, "Number of return instructions duplicated");
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +000067STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved");
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +000068STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches");
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +000069STATISTIC(NumAndCmpsMoved, "Number of and/cmp's pushed into branches");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000070STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed");
Jakob Stoklund Oleseneb12f492010-09-30 20:51:52 +000071
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +000072static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts(
73 "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
74 cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
75
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000076static cl::opt<bool>
77 DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
78 cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
79
Benjamin Kramer3d38c172012-05-06 14:25:16 +000080static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch(
81 "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
82 cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion."));
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +000083
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +000084static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs(
85 "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs."));
87
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +000088static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking(
89 "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
90 cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches."));
91
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000092static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract(
93 "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
94 cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
95
96static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract(
97 "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
98 cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
99
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000100static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion(
101 "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
102 cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in "
103 "CodeGenPrepare"));
104
105static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion(
106 "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
107 cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) "
108 "optimization in CodeGenPrepare"));
109
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000110namespace {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000111typedef SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> SetOfInstrs;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +0000112struct TypeIsSExt {
113 Type *Ty;
114 bool IsSExt;
115 TypeIsSExt(Type *Ty, bool IsSExt) : Ty(Ty), IsSExt(IsSExt) {}
116};
117typedef DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt> InstrToOrigTy;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000118class TypePromotionTransaction;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000119
Chris Lattner2dd09db2009-09-02 06:11:42 +0000120 class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000121 /// TLI - Keep a pointer of a TargetLowering to consult for determining
122 /// transformation profitability.
Bill Wendling7a639ea2013-06-19 21:07:11 +0000123 const TargetMachine *TM;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000124 const TargetLowering *TLI;
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000125 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI;
Chad Rosierc24b86f2011-12-01 03:08:23 +0000126 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000127
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +0000128 /// CurInstIterator - As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the
129 /// next instruction to optimize. Xforms that can invalidate this should
130 /// update it.
131 BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator;
Evan Cheng3b3de7c2008-12-19 18:03:11 +0000132
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000133 /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block.
134 /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with
135 /// multiple load/stores of the same address.
Nick Lewycky5fb19632013-05-08 09:00:10 +0000136 ValueMap<Value*, Value*> SunkAddrs;
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000137
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000138 /// Keeps track of all truncates inserted for the current function.
139 SetOfInstrs InsertedTruncsSet;
140 /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their
141 /// promotion for the current function.
142 InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts;
143
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000144 /// ModifiedDT - If CFG is modified in anyway.
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000145 bool ModifiedDT;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000146
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +0000147 /// OptSize - True if optimizing for size.
148 bool OptSize;
149
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000150 public:
Nick Lewyckye7da2d62007-05-06 13:37:16 +0000151 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +0000152 explicit CodeGenPrepare(const TargetMachine *TM = nullptr)
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000153 : FunctionPass(ID), TM(TM), TLI(nullptr), TTI(nullptr) {
Owen Anderson6c18d1a2010-10-19 17:21:58 +0000154 initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
155 }
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000156 bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000157
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000158 const char *getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; }
Evan Cheng99cafb12012-12-21 01:48:14 +0000159
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000160 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override {
Chandler Carruth73523022014-01-13 13:07:17 +0000161 AU.addPreserved<DominatorTreeWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000162 AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruth705b1852015-01-31 03:43:40 +0000163 AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>();
Andreas Neustifterf8cb7582009-09-16 09:26:52 +0000164 }
165
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000166 private:
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000167 bool EliminateFallThrough(Function &F);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000168 bool EliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F);
169 bool CanMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const;
170 void EliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000171 bool OptimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool& ModifiedDT);
172 bool OptimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool& ModifiedDT);
Chris Lattner229907c2011-07-18 04:54:35 +0000173 bool OptimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *I, Value *Addr, Type *AccessTy);
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +0000174 bool OptimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000175 bool OptimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool& ModifiedDT);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000176 bool MoveExtToFormExtLoad(Instruction *&I);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +0000177 bool OptimizeExtUses(Instruction *I);
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +0000178 bool OptimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +0000179 bool OptimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SI);
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000180 bool OptimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst);
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +0000181 bool DupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB);
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000182 bool PlaceDbgValues(Function &F);
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000183 bool sinkAndCmp(Function &F);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000184 bool ExtLdPromotion(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, LoadInst *&LI,
185 Instruction *&Inst,
186 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +0000187 unsigned CreatedInstCost);
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000188 bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000189 bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000190 };
191}
Devang Patel09f162c2007-05-01 21:15:47 +0000192
Devang Patel8c78a0b2007-05-03 01:11:54 +0000193char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0;
Jiangning Liud623c522014-06-11 07:04:37 +0000194INITIALIZE_TM_PASS(CodeGenPrepare, "codegenprepare",
195 "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000196
Bill Wendling7a639ea2013-06-19 21:07:11 +0000197FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass(const TargetMachine *TM) {
198 return new CodeGenPrepare(TM);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000199}
200
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000201bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) {
Paul Robinson7c99ec52014-03-31 17:43:35 +0000202 if (skipOptnoneFunction(F))
203 return false;
204
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000205 bool EverMadeChange = false;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000206 // Clear per function information.
207 InsertedTruncsSet.clear();
208 PromotedInsts.clear();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000209
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000210 ModifiedDT = false;
Eric Christopherd9134482014-08-04 21:25:23 +0000211 if (TM)
Eric Christopherfccff372015-01-27 01:01:38 +0000212 TLI = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F)->getTargetLowering();
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000213 TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI();
Chandler Carruthfdb9c572015-02-01 12:01:35 +0000214 TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith70eb9c52015-02-14 01:44:41 +0000215 OptSize = F.hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptimizeForSize);
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000216
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000217 /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be
218 /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide.
Preston Gurd485296d2013-03-04 18:13:57 +0000219 if (!OptSize && TLI && TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) {
Preston Gurd0d67f512012-10-04 21:33:40 +0000220 const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths =
221 TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths();
Evan Cheng71be12b2012-09-14 21:25:34 +0000222 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); I++)
Preston Gurd0d67f512012-10-04 21:33:40 +0000223 EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(F, I, BypassWidths);
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000224 }
225
226 // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000227 // unconditional branch.
228 EverMadeChange |= EliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000229
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000230 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000231 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000232 // find a node corresponding to the value.
233 EverMadeChange |= PlaceDbgValues(F);
234
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000235 // If there is a mask, compare against zero, and branch that can be combined
236 // into a single target instruction, push the mask and compare into branch
237 // users. Do this before OptimizeBlock -> OptimizeInst ->
238 // OptimizeCmpExpression, which perturbs the pattern being searched for.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000239 if (!DisableBranchOpts) {
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000240 EverMadeChange |= sinkAndCmp(F);
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000241 EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F);
242 }
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000243
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000244 bool MadeChange = true;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000245 while (MadeChange) {
246 MadeChange = false;
Hans Wennborg02fbc712012-09-19 07:48:16 +0000247 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) {
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000248 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000249 bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false;
250 MadeChange |= OptimizeBlock(*BB, ModifiedDTOnIteration);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000251
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000252 // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000253 if (ModifiedDTOnIteration)
254 break;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000255 }
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000256 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
257 }
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000258
259 SunkAddrs.clear();
260
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000261 if (!DisableBranchOpts) {
262 MadeChange = false;
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000263 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +0000264 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
265 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB));
266 MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true);
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000267 if (!MadeChange) continue;
268
269 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
270 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
271 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
272 WorkList.insert(*II);
273 }
274
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000275 // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors.
Bill Wendlingab417b62012-12-06 00:30:20 +0000276 MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty();
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000277 while (!WorkList.empty()) {
278 BasicBlock *BB = *WorkList.begin();
279 WorkList.erase(BB);
280 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
281
282 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +0000283
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000284 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
285 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
286 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
287 WorkList.insert(*II);
288 }
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000289
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000290 // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by
291 // a single edge.
292 if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange)
293 MadeChange |= EliminateFallThrough(F);
294
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000295 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
296 }
297
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000298 if (!DisableGCOpts) {
299 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints;
300 for (BasicBlock &BB : F)
301 for (Instruction &I : BB)
302 if (isStatepoint(I))
303 Statepoints.push_back(&I);
304 for (auto &I : Statepoints)
305 EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I);
306 }
307
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000308 return EverMadeChange;
309}
310
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000311/// EliminateFallThrough - Merge basic blocks which are connected
312/// by a single edge, where one of the basic blocks has a single successor
313/// pointing to the other basic block, which has a single predecessor.
314bool CodeGenPrepare::EliminateFallThrough(Function &F) {
315 bool Changed = false;
316 // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000317 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000318 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
319 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial
320 // edge, just collapse it.
321 BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
322
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +0000323 // Don't merge if BB's address is taken.
324 if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000325
326 BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator());
327 if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) {
328 Changed = true;
Michael Liao6e12d122012-08-21 05:55:22 +0000329 DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n"<< *SinglePred << "\n\n\n");
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000330 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function.
331 // If so, we will need to move BB back to the entry position.
332 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000333 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(BB, nullptr);
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000334
335 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
336 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
337
338 // We have erased a block. Update the iterator.
339 I = BB;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000340 }
341 }
342 return Changed;
343}
344
Dale Johannesen4026b042009-03-27 01:13:37 +0000345/// EliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks - eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes,
346/// debug info directives, and an unconditional branch. Passes before isel
347/// (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split edges in ways that are non-optimal for
348/// isel. Start by eliminating these blocks so we can split them the way we
349/// want them.
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000350bool CodeGenPrepare::EliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) {
351 bool MadeChange = false;
352 // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000353 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000354 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
355
356 // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it.
357 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
358 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional())
359 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000360
Dale Johannesen4026b042009-03-27 01:13:37 +0000361 // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi
362 // node, then other stuff is happening here.
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000363 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI;
364 if (BBI != BB->begin()) {
365 --BBI;
Dale Johannesen4026b042009-03-27 01:13:37 +0000366 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) {
367 if (BBI == BB->begin())
368 break;
369 --BBI;
370 }
371 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI))
372 continue;
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000373 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000374
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000375 // Do not break infinite loops.
376 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
377 if (DestBB == BB)
378 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000379
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000380 if (!CanMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB))
381 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000382
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000383 EliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB);
384 MadeChange = true;
385 }
386 return MadeChange;
387}
388
389/// CanMergeBlocks - Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a
390/// single uncond branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi
391/// instructions.
392bool CodeGenPrepare::CanMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB,
393 const BasicBlock *DestBB) const {
394 // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in
395 // the successor. If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders),
396 // don't mess around with them.
397 BasicBlock::const_iterator BBI = BB->begin();
398 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000399 for (const User *U : PN->users()) {
400 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
401 if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI))
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000402 return false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000403 // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check
404 // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000405 // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000406 if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) {
407 if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI))
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000408 for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
409 Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I));
410 if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB &&
411 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I))
412 return false;
413 }
414 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000415 }
416 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000417
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000418 // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB
419 // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block. If so, we
420 // can't merge the block.
421 const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin());
422 if (!DestBBPN) return true; // no conflict.
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000423
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000424 // Collect the preds of BB.
Chris Lattner8201a9b2007-11-06 22:07:40 +0000425 SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds;
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000426 if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
427 // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator.
428 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
429 BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
430 } else {
431 BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
432 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000433
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000434 // Walk the preds of DestBB.
435 for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
436 BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i);
437 if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) { // Common predecessor?
438 BBI = DestBB->begin();
439 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
440 const Value *V1 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
441 const Value *V2 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000442
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000443 // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be.
444 if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2))
445 if (V2PN->getParent() == BB)
446 V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000447
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000448 // If there is a conflict, bail out.
449 if (V1 != V2) return false;
450 }
451 }
452 }
453
454 return true;
455}
456
457
458/// EliminateMostlyEmptyBlock - Eliminate a basic block that have only phi's and
459/// an unconditional branch in it.
460void CodeGenPrepare::EliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
461 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
462 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000463
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000464 DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n" << *BB << *DestBB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000465
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000466 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge,
467 // just collapse it.
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000468 if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000469 if (SinglePred != DestBB) {
470 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function. If so, we
471 // will need to move BB back to the entry position.
472 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000473 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(DestBB, nullptr);
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000474
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000475 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
476 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000477
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000478 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000479 return;
480 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000481 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000482
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000483 // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB. Update the PHIs in DestBB
484 // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have.
485 PHINode *PN;
486 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = DestBB->begin();
487 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
488 // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it.
489 Value *InVal = PN->removeIncomingValue(BB, false);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000490
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000491 // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some
492 // value that dominates BB.
493 PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal);
494 if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) {
495 // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi.
496 for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
497 PN->addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i),
498 InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i));
499 } else {
500 // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that
501 // we will be adding.
502 if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
503 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
504 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
505 } else {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000506 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
507 PN->addIncoming(InVal, *PI);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000508 }
509 }
510 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000511
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000512 // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use
513 // DestBB and remove BB.
514 BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB);
515 BB->eraseFromParent();
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000516 ++NumBlocksElim;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000517
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000518 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000519}
520
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000521// Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding
522// derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls
523static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(
524 const SmallVectorImpl<User *> &AllRelocateCalls,
525 DenseMap<IntrinsicInst *, SmallVector<IntrinsicInst *, 2>> &
526 RelocateInstMap) {
527 // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object
528 // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding
529 // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls
530 DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, IntrinsicInst *> RelocateIdxMap;
531 for (auto &U : AllRelocateCalls) {
532 GCRelocateOperands ThisRelocate(U);
533 IntrinsicInst *I = cast<IntrinsicInst>(U);
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000534 auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate.getBasePtrIndex(),
535 ThisRelocate.getDerivedPtrIndex());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000536 RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, I));
537 }
538 for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) {
539 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first;
540 if (Key.first == Key.second)
541 // Base relocation: nothing to insert
542 continue;
543
544 IntrinsicInst *I = Item.second;
545 auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first);
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000546
547 // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it.
548 auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey);
549 if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end())
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000550 // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off
551 // that, if there are enough derived object relocates.
552 continue;
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000553
554 RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000555 }
556}
557
558// Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all
559// small integer constants
560static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP,
561 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) {
562 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) {
563 // Only accept small constant integer operands
564 auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i));
565 if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20)
566 return false;
567 }
568
569 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++)
570 OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i));
571 return true;
572}
573
574// Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to
575// replace, computes a replacement, and affects it.
576static bool
577simplifyRelocatesOffABase(IntrinsicInst *RelocatedBase,
578 const SmallVectorImpl<IntrinsicInst *> &Targets) {
579 bool MadeChange = false;
580 for (auto &ToReplace : Targets) {
581 GCRelocateOperands MasterRelocate(RelocatedBase);
582 GCRelocateOperands ThisRelocate(ToReplace);
583
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000584 assert(ThisRelocate.getBasePtrIndex() == MasterRelocate.getBasePtrIndex() &&
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000585 "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object");
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000586 if (ThisRelocate.getBasePtrIndex() == ThisRelocate.getDerivedPtrIndex()) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000587 // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates.
588 continue;
589 }
590
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000591 Value *Base = ThisRelocate.getBasePtr();
592 auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ThisRelocate.getDerivedPtr());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000593 if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base)
594 continue;
595
596 SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV;
597 if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV))
598 continue;
599
600 // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep
601 IRBuilder<> Builder(ToReplace);
602 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000603
604 // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type.
605 // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not
606 // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be
607 // cases like this:
608 // bb1:
609 // ...
610 // %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
611 // br label %merge
612 //
613 // bb2:
614 // ...
615 // %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
616 // br label %merge
617 //
618 // merge:
619 // %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ]
620 // %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)*
621 //
622 // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast
623 // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and
624 // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes.
625 Instruction *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase;
626 if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) {
627 ActualRelocatedBase =
628 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType()));
629 ActualRelocatedBase->removeFromParent();
630 ActualRelocatedBase->insertAfter(cast<Instruction>(RelocatedBase));
631 }
David Blaikie68d535c2015-03-24 22:38:16 +0000632 Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP(
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000633 Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV));
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000634 Instruction *ReplacementInst = cast<Instruction>(Replacement);
635 ReplacementInst->removeFromParent();
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000636 ReplacementInst->insertAfter(ActualRelocatedBase);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000637 Replacement->takeName(ToReplace);
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000638 // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived
639 // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above.
640 Instruction *ActualReplacement = ReplacementInst;
641 if (ReplacementInst->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) {
642 ActualReplacement =
643 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBitCast(ReplacementInst, ToReplace->getType()));
644 ActualReplacement->removeFromParent();
645 ActualReplacement->insertAfter(ReplacementInst);
646 }
647 ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000648 ToReplace->eraseFromParent();
649
650 MadeChange = true;
651 }
652 return MadeChange;
653}
654
655// Turns this:
656//
657// %base = ...
658// %ptr = gep %base + 15
659// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
660// %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
661// %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5)
662// %val = load %ptr'
663//
664// into this:
665//
666// %base = ...
667// %ptr = gep %base + 15
668// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
669// %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
670// %ptr' = gep %base' + 15
671// %val = load %ptr'
672bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) {
673 bool MadeChange = false;
674 SmallVector<User *, 2> AllRelocateCalls;
675
676 for (auto *U : I.users())
677 if (isGCRelocate(dyn_cast<Instruction>(U)))
678 // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint
679 AllRelocateCalls.push_back(U);
680
681 // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer
682 // relocation to mangle
683 if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2)
684 return false;
685
686 // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the
687 // corresponding derived relocate instructions
688 DenseMap<IntrinsicInst *, SmallVector<IntrinsicInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap;
689 computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap);
690 if (RelocateInstMap.empty())
691 return false;
692
693 for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap)
694 // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against
695 // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace
696 MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second);
697 return MadeChange;
698}
699
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +0000700/// SinkCast - Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks
701static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000702 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000703
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000704 /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000705 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000706
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000707 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000708 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000709 UI != E; ) {
710 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
711 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000712
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000713 // Figure out which BB this cast is used in. For PHI's this is the
714 // appropriate predecessor block.
715 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
716 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000717 UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000718 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000719
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000720 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
721 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000722
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000723 // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast.
724 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000725
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000726 // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it.
727 CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB];
728
729 if (!InsertedCast) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +0000730 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000731 InsertedCast =
732 CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0), CI->getType(), "",
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000733 InsertPt);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000734 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000735
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000736 // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000737 TheUse = InsertedCast;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000738 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000739 ++NumCastUses;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000740 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000741
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000742 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast.
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +0000743 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000744 CI->eraseFromParent();
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +0000745 MadeChange = true;
746 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000747
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000748 return MadeChange;
749}
750
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +0000751/// OptimizeNoopCopyExpression - If the specified cast instruction is a noop
752/// copy (e.g. it's casting from one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC),
753/// sink it into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual
754/// registers that must be created and coalesced.
755///
756/// Return true if any changes are made.
757///
758static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI){
759 // If this is a noop copy,
760 EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(CI->getOperand(0)->getType());
761 EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(CI->getType());
762
763 // This is an fp<->int conversion?
764 if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger())
765 return false;
766
767 // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which
768 // isn't a noop.
769 if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false;
770
771 // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted
772 // to. This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they
773 // are.
774 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) ==
775 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
776 SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT);
777 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) ==
778 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
779 DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT);
780
781 // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy.
782 if (SrcVT != DstVT)
783 return false;
784
785 return SinkCast(CI);
786}
787
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +0000788/// CombineUAddWithOverflow - try to combine CI into a call to the
789/// llvm.uadd.with.overflow intrinsic if possible.
790///
791/// Return true if any changes were made.
792static bool CombineUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *CI) {
793 Value *A, *B;
794 Instruction *AddI;
795 if (!match(CI,
796 m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_Instruction(AddI))))
797 return false;
798
799 Type *Ty = AddI->getType();
800 if (!isa<IntegerType>(Ty))
801 return false;
802
803 // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we we
804 // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic
805 // block containing the icmp:
806
807 if (AddI->getParent() != CI->getParent() && !AddI->hasOneUse())
808 return false;
809
810#ifndef NDEBUG
811 // Someday m_UAddWithOverflow may get smarter, but this is a safe assumption
812 // for now:
813 if (AddI->hasOneUse())
814 assert(*AddI->user_begin() == CI && "expected!");
815#endif
816
817 Module *M = CI->getParent()->getParent()->getParent();
818 Value *F = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(M, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow, Ty);
819
820 auto *InsertPt = AddI->hasOneUse() ? CI : AddI;
821
822 auto *UAddWithOverflow =
823 CallInst::Create(F, {A, B}, "uadd.overflow", InsertPt);
824 auto *UAdd = ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 0, "uadd", InsertPt);
825 auto *Overflow =
826 ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 1, "overflow", InsertPt);
827
828 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Overflow);
829 AddI->replaceAllUsesWith(UAdd);
830 CI->eraseFromParent();
831 AddI->eraseFromParent();
832 return true;
833}
834
835/// SinkCmpExpression - Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000836/// the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced. This is
Chris Lattner27406942007-08-02 16:53:43 +0000837/// a clear win except on targets with multiple condition code registers
838/// (PowerPC), where it might lose; some adjustment may be wanted there.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000839///
840/// Return true if any changes are made.
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +0000841static bool SinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000842 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000843
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000844 /// InsertedCmp - Only insert a cmp in each block once.
845 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000846
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000847 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000848 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000849 UI != E; ) {
850 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
851 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000852
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000853 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
854 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000855
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000856 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
857 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
858 continue;
859
860 // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in.
861 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000862
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000863 // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp.
864 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000865
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000866 // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it.
867 CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB];
868
869 if (!InsertedCmp) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +0000870 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000871 InsertedCmp =
Dan Gohmanad1f0a12009-08-25 23:17:54 +0000872 CmpInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(),
Owen Anderson1e5f00e2009-07-09 23:48:35 +0000873 CI->getPredicate(), CI->getOperand(0),
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000874 CI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt);
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000875 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000876
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000877 // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp.
878 TheUse = InsertedCmp;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000879 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000880 ++NumCmpUses;
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000881 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000882
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000883 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp.
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000884 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000885 CI->eraseFromParent();
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000886 MadeChange = true;
887 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000888
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000889 return MadeChange;
890}
891
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +0000892static bool OptimizeCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI) {
893 if (SinkCmpExpression(CI))
894 return true;
895
896 if (CombineUAddWithOverflow(CI))
897 return true;
898
899 return false;
900}
901
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000902/// isExtractBitsCandidateUse - Check if the candidates could
903/// be combined with shift instruction, which includes:
904/// 1. Truncate instruction
905/// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits:
906/// imm & (imm+1) == 0
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +0000907static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000908 if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) {
909 if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And ||
910 !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)))
911 return false;
912
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +0000913 const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue();
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000914
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +0000915 if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue())
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000916 return false;
917 }
918 return true;
919}
920
921/// SinkShiftAndTruncate - sink both shift and truncate instruction
922/// to the use of truncate's BB.
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +0000923static bool
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000924SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI,
925 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts,
926 const TargetLowering &TLI) {
927 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
928 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs;
929 TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User);
930 bool MadeChange = false;
931
932 for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(),
933 TruncE = TruncI->user_end();
934 TruncUI != TruncE;) {
935
936 Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse();
937 Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI);
938 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
939
940 ++TruncUI;
941
942 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode());
943 if (!ISDOpcode)
944 continue;
945
Tim Northovere2239ff2014-07-29 10:20:22 +0000946 // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an
947 // implicit truncate.
948 // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an
949 // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the
950 // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though.
Ahmed Bougacha0788d492014-11-12 22:16:55 +0000951 if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
952 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(TruncUser->getType(), true)))
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000953 continue;
954
955 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
956 if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser))
957 continue;
958
959 BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent();
960
961 if (UserBB == TruncUserBB)
962 continue;
963
964 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB];
965 CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB];
966
967 if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) {
968 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
969 // Sink the shift
970 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
971 InsertedShift =
972 BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
973 else
974 InsertedShift =
975 BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
976
977 // Sink the trunc
978 BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
979 TruncInsertPt++;
980
981 InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift,
982 TruncI->getType(), "", TruncInsertPt);
983
984 MadeChange = true;
985
986 TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc;
987 }
988 }
989 return MadeChange;
990}
991
992/// OptimizeExtractBits - sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if
993/// the uses could potentially be combined with this shift instruction and
994/// generate BitExtract instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture
995/// supports BitExtract instruction. Here is an example:
996/// BB1:
997/// %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
998/// BB2:
999/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16
1000/// ==>
1001///
1002/// BB2:
1003/// %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
1004/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16
1005///
1006/// CodeGen will recoginze the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract
1007/// instruction.
1008/// Return true if any changes are made.
1009static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI,
1010 const TargetLowering &TLI) {
1011 BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent();
1012
1013 /// Only insert instructions in each block once.
1014 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts;
1015
1016 bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(ShiftI->getType()));
1017
1018 bool MadeChange = false;
1019 for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end();
1020 UI != E;) {
1021 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1022 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1023 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1024 ++UI;
1025
1026 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1027 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1028 continue;
1029
1030 if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User))
1031 continue;
1032
1033 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1034
1035 if (UserBB == DefBB) {
1036 // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of
1037 // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not
1038 // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate
1039 // instruction to the BB of TruncUse.
1040 // for example:
1041 // BB1:
1042 // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm
1043 // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16
1044 //
1045 // BB2:
1046 // ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does
1047 // not have i16 compare.
1048 // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2
1049 //
1050 if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal
1051 // If the type of the truncate is legal, no trucate will be
1052 // introduced in other basic blocks.
1053 && (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(User->getType()))))
1054 MadeChange =
1055 SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI);
1056
1057 continue;
1058 }
1059 // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it.
1060 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB];
1061
1062 if (!InsertedShift) {
1063 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1064
1065 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
1066 InsertedShift =
1067 BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
1068 else
1069 InsertedShift =
1070 BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
1071
1072 MadeChange = true;
1073 }
1074
1075 // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift.
1076 TheUse = InsertedShift;
1077 }
1078
1079 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift.
1080 if (ShiftI->use_empty())
1081 ShiftI->eraseFromParent();
1082
1083 return MadeChange;
1084}
1085
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001086// ScalarizeMaskedLoad() translates masked load intrinsic, like
1087// <16 x i32 > @llvm.masked.load( <16 x i32>* %addr, i32 align,
1088// <16 x i1> %mask, <16 x i32> %passthru)
1089// to a chain of basic blocks, whith loading element one-by-one if
1090// the appropriate mask bit is set
1091//
1092// %1 = bitcast i8* %addr to i32*
1093// %2 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 0
1094// %3 = icmp eq i1 %2, true
1095// br i1 %3, label %cond.load, label %else
1096//
1097//cond.load: ; preds = %0
1098// %4 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1099// %5 = load i32* %4
1100// %6 = insertelement <16 x i32> undef, i32 %5, i32 0
1101// br label %else
1102//
1103//else: ; preds = %0, %cond.load
1104// %res.phi.else = phi <16 x i32> [ %6, %cond.load ], [ undef, %0 ]
1105// %7 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 1
1106// %8 = icmp eq i1 %7, true
1107// br i1 %8, label %cond.load1, label %else2
1108//
1109//cond.load1: ; preds = %else
1110// %9 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 1
1111// %10 = load i32* %9
1112// %11 = insertelement <16 x i32> %res.phi.else, i32 %10, i32 1
1113// br label %else2
1114//
1115//else2: ; preds = %else, %cond.load1
1116// %res.phi.else3 = phi <16 x i32> [ %11, %cond.load1 ], [ %res.phi.else, %else ]
1117// %12 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 2
1118// %13 = icmp eq i1 %12, true
1119// br i1 %13, label %cond.load4, label %else5
1120//
1121static void ScalarizeMaskedLoad(CallInst *CI) {
1122 Value *Ptr = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1123 Value *Src0 = CI->getArgOperand(3);
1124 Value *Mask = CI->getArgOperand(2);
1125 VectorType *VecType = dyn_cast<VectorType>(CI->getType());
1126 Type *EltTy = VecType->getElementType();
1127
1128 assert(VecType && "Unexpected return type of masked load intrinsic");
1129
1130 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1131 Instruction *InsertPt = CI;
1132 BasicBlock *IfBlock = CI->getParent();
1133 BasicBlock *CondBlock = nullptr;
1134 BasicBlock *PrevIfBlock = CI->getParent();
1135 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1136
1137 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CI->getDebugLoc());
1138
1139 // Bitcast %addr fron i8* to EltTy*
1140 Type *NewPtrType =
1141 EltTy->getPointerTo(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType())->getAddressSpace());
1142 Value *FirstEltPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(Ptr, NewPtrType);
1143 Value *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(VecType);
1144
1145 // The result vector
1146 Value *VResult = UndefVal;
1147
1148 PHINode *Phi = nullptr;
1149 Value *PrevPhi = UndefVal;
1150
1151 unsigned VectorWidth = VecType->getNumElements();
1152 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx < VectorWidth; ++Idx) {
1153
1154 // Fill the "else" block, created in the previous iteration
1155 //
1156 // %res.phi.else3 = phi <16 x i32> [ %11, %cond.load1 ], [ %res.phi.else, %else ]
1157 // %mask_1 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 Idx
1158 // %to_load = icmp eq i1 %mask_1, true
1159 // br i1 %to_load, label %cond.load, label %else
1160 //
1161 if (Idx > 0) {
1162 Phi = Builder.CreatePHI(VecType, 2, "res.phi.else");
1163 Phi->addIncoming(VResult, CondBlock);
1164 Phi->addIncoming(PrevPhi, PrevIfBlock);
1165 PrevPhi = Phi;
1166 VResult = Phi;
1167 }
1168
1169 Value *Predicate = Builder.CreateExtractElement(Mask, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
1170 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ, Predicate,
1171 ConstantInt::get(Predicate->getType(), 1));
1172
1173 // Create "cond" block
1174 //
1175 // %EltAddr = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1176 // %Elt = load i32* %EltAddr
1177 // VResult = insertelement <16 x i32> VResult, i32 %Elt, i32 Idx
1178 //
1179 CondBlock = IfBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "cond.load");
1180 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00001181
1182 Value *Gep =
1183 Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(EltTy, FirstEltPtr, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001184 LoadInst* Load = Builder.CreateLoad(Gep, false);
1185 VResult = Builder.CreateInsertElement(VResult, Load, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
1186
1187 // Create "else" block, fill it in the next iteration
1188 BasicBlock *NewIfBlock = CondBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "else");
1189 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1190 Instruction *OldBr = IfBlock->getTerminator();
1191 BranchInst::Create(CondBlock, NewIfBlock, Cmp, OldBr);
1192 OldBr->eraseFromParent();
1193 PrevIfBlock = IfBlock;
1194 IfBlock = NewIfBlock;
1195 }
1196
1197 Phi = Builder.CreatePHI(VecType, 2, "res.phi.select");
1198 Phi->addIncoming(VResult, CondBlock);
1199 Phi->addIncoming(PrevPhi, PrevIfBlock);
1200 Value *NewI = Builder.CreateSelect(Mask, Phi, Src0);
1201 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(NewI);
1202 CI->eraseFromParent();
1203}
1204
1205// ScalarizeMaskedStore() translates masked store intrinsic, like
1206// void @llvm.masked.store(<16 x i32> %src, <16 x i32>* %addr, i32 align,
1207// <16 x i1> %mask)
1208// to a chain of basic blocks, that stores element one-by-one if
1209// the appropriate mask bit is set
1210//
1211// %1 = bitcast i8* %addr to i32*
1212// %2 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 0
1213// %3 = icmp eq i1 %2, true
1214// br i1 %3, label %cond.store, label %else
1215//
1216// cond.store: ; preds = %0
1217// %4 = extractelement <16 x i32> %val, i32 0
1218// %5 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1219// store i32 %4, i32* %5
1220// br label %else
1221//
1222// else: ; preds = %0, %cond.store
1223// %6 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 1
1224// %7 = icmp eq i1 %6, true
1225// br i1 %7, label %cond.store1, label %else2
1226//
1227// cond.store1: ; preds = %else
1228// %8 = extractelement <16 x i32> %val, i32 1
1229// %9 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 1
1230// store i32 %8, i32* %9
1231// br label %else2
1232// . . .
1233static void ScalarizeMaskedStore(CallInst *CI) {
1234 Value *Ptr = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1235 Value *Src = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1236 Value *Mask = CI->getArgOperand(3);
1237
1238 VectorType *VecType = dyn_cast<VectorType>(Src->getType());
1239 Type *EltTy = VecType->getElementType();
1240
1241 assert(VecType && "Unexpected data type in masked store intrinsic");
1242
1243 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1244 Instruction *InsertPt = CI;
1245 BasicBlock *IfBlock = CI->getParent();
1246 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1247 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CI->getDebugLoc());
1248
1249 // Bitcast %addr fron i8* to EltTy*
1250 Type *NewPtrType =
1251 EltTy->getPointerTo(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType())->getAddressSpace());
1252 Value *FirstEltPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(Ptr, NewPtrType);
1253
1254 unsigned VectorWidth = VecType->getNumElements();
1255 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx < VectorWidth; ++Idx) {
1256
1257 // Fill the "else" block, created in the previous iteration
1258 //
1259 // %mask_1 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 Idx
1260 // %to_store = icmp eq i1 %mask_1, true
1261 // br i1 %to_load, label %cond.store, label %else
1262 //
1263 Value *Predicate = Builder.CreateExtractElement(Mask, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
1264 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ, Predicate,
1265 ConstantInt::get(Predicate->getType(), 1));
1266
1267 // Create "cond" block
1268 //
1269 // %OneElt = extractelement <16 x i32> %Src, i32 Idx
1270 // %EltAddr = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1271 // %store i32 %OneElt, i32* %EltAddr
1272 //
1273 BasicBlock *CondBlock = IfBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "cond.store");
1274 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1275
1276 Value *OneElt = Builder.CreateExtractElement(Src, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00001277 Value *Gep =
1278 Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(EltTy, FirstEltPtr, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001279 Builder.CreateStore(OneElt, Gep);
1280
1281 // Create "else" block, fill it in the next iteration
1282 BasicBlock *NewIfBlock = CondBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "else");
1283 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1284 Instruction *OldBr = IfBlock->getTerminator();
1285 BranchInst::Create(CondBlock, NewIfBlock, Cmp, OldBr);
1286 OldBr->eraseFromParent();
1287 IfBlock = NewIfBlock;
1288 }
1289 CI->eraseFromParent();
1290}
1291
1292bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00001293 BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001294
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00001295 // Lower inline assembly if we can.
1296 // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to
1297 // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now.
1298 if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) {
1299 if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) {
1300 // Avoid invalidating the iterator.
1301 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
1302 // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause
1303 // reuse before a value is defined.
1304 SunkAddrs.clear();
1305 return true;
1306 }
1307 // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block.
1308 if (OptimizeInlineAsmInst(CI))
1309 return true;
1310 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001311
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001312 const DataLayout *TD = TLI ? TLI->getDataLayout() : nullptr;
1313
1314 // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good
1315 // idea
1316 unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign;
1317 if (TLI && TD && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) {
1318 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
1319 // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and
1320 // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes
1321 // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and
1322 // if size - offset meets the size threshold.
1323 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
1324 continue;
1325 APInt Offset(TD->getPointerSizeInBits(
1326 cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()), 0);
1327 Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*TD, Offset);
1328 uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue();
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00001329 if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0)
1330 continue;
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001331 AllocaInst *AI;
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00001332 if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) &&
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001333 AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign &&
1334 TD->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2)
1335 AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00001336 // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this
1337 // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and
1338 // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is
1339 // forbidden.
1340 GlobalVariable *GV;
1341 if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) &&
1342 GV->hasUniqueInitializer() &&
1343 !GV->hasSection() &&
1344 GV->getAlignment() < PrefAlign &&
1345 TD->getTypeAllocSize(
1346 GV->getType()->getElementType()) >= MinSize + Offset2)
1347 GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001348 }
1349 // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the
1350 // alignment
1351 if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) {
1352 unsigned Align = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *TD);
1353 if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI))
1354 Align = std::min(Align, getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *TD));
1355 if (Align > MI->getAlignment())
1356 MI->setAlignment(ConstantInt::get(MI->getAlignmentType(), Align));
1357 }
1358 }
1359
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001360 IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001361 if (II) {
1362 switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
1363 default: break;
1364 case Intrinsic::objectsize: {
1365 // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.*
1366 bool Min = (cast<ConstantInt>(II->getArgOperand(1))->getZExtValue() == 1);
1367 Type *ReturnTy = CI->getType();
1368 Constant *RetVal = ConstantInt::get(ReturnTy, Min ? 0 : -1ULL);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001369
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001370 // Substituting this can cause recursive simplifications, which can
1371 // invalidate our iterator. Use a WeakVH to hold onto it in case this
1372 // happens.
1373 WeakVH IterHandle(CurInstIterator);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001374
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001375 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal,
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +00001376 TLInfo, nullptr);
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00001377
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001378 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
1379 // start of the block.
1380 if (IterHandle != CurInstIterator) {
1381 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
1382 SunkAddrs.clear();
1383 }
1384 return true;
Chris Lattner86d56c62011-01-18 20:53:04 +00001385 }
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001386 case Intrinsic::masked_load: {
1387 // Scalarize unsupported vector masked load
1388 if (!TTI->isLegalMaskedLoad(CI->getType(), 1)) {
1389 ScalarizeMaskedLoad(CI);
1390 ModifiedDT = true;
1391 return true;
1392 }
1393 return false;
1394 }
1395 case Intrinsic::masked_store: {
1396 if (!TTI->isLegalMaskedStore(CI->getArgOperand(0)->getType(), 1)) {
1397 ScalarizeMaskedStore(CI);
1398 ModifiedDT = true;
1399 return true;
1400 }
1401 return false;
1402 }
1403 }
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001404
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001405 if (TLI) {
1406 SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps;
1407 Type *AccessTy;
1408 if (TLI->GetAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy))
1409 while (!PtrOps.empty())
1410 if (OptimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrOps.pop_back_val(), AccessTy))
1411 return true;
1412 }
Pete Cooper615fd892012-03-13 20:59:56 +00001413 }
1414
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001415 // From here on out we're working with named functions.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001416 if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false;
Devang Patel0da52502011-05-26 21:51:06 +00001417
Benjamin Kramer7b88a492010-03-12 09:27:41 +00001418 // Lower all default uses of _chk calls. This is very similar
1419 // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00001420 // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default
1421 // "don't know" as the objectsize. Anything else should be left alone.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001422 FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true);
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00001423 if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) {
1424 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
1425 CI->eraseFromParent();
1426 return true;
1427 }
1428 return false;
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001429}
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00001430
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001431/// DupRetToEnableTailCallOpts - Look for opportunities to duplicate return
1432/// instructions to the predecessor to enable tail call optimizations. The
1433/// case it is currently looking for is:
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001434/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001435/// bb0:
1436/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
1437/// br label %return
1438/// bb1:
1439/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
1440/// br label %return
1441/// bb2:
1442/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
1443/// br label %return
1444/// return:
1445/// %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ]
1446/// ret i32 %retval
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001447/// @endcode
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001448///
1449/// =>
1450///
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001451/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001452/// bb0:
1453/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
1454/// ret i32 %tmp0
1455/// bb1:
1456/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
1457/// ret i32 %tmp1
1458/// bb2:
1459/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
1460/// ret i32 %tmp2
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001461/// @endcode
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00001462bool CodeGenPrepare::DupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB) {
Cameron Zwarich47e71752011-03-24 04:51:51 +00001463 if (!TLI)
1464 return false;
1465
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00001466 ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator());
1467 if (!RI)
1468 return false;
1469
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001470 PHINode *PN = nullptr;
1471 BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001472 Value *V = RI->getReturnValue();
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00001473 if (V) {
1474 BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V);
1475 if (BCI)
1476 V = BCI->getOperand(0);
1477
1478 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V);
1479 if (!PN)
1480 return false;
1481 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001482
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001483 if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB)
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001484 return false;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001485
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001486 // It's not safe to eliminate the sign / zero extension of the return value.
1487 // See llvm::isInTailCallPosition().
1488 const Function *F = BB->getParent();
Bill Wendling658d24d2013-01-18 21:53:16 +00001489 AttributeSet CallerAttrs = F->getAttributes();
1490 if (CallerAttrs.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::ReturnIndex, Attribute::ZExt) ||
1491 CallerAttrs.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::ReturnIndex, Attribute::SExt))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001492 return false;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001493
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001494 // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the
1495 // return is the first instruction in the block.
1496 if (PN) {
1497 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
1498 do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI));
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00001499 if (&*BI == BCI)
1500 // Also skip over the bitcast.
1501 ++BI;
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001502 if (&*BI != RI)
1503 return false;
1504 } else {
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00001505 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
1506 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI;
1507 if (&*BI != RI)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001508 return false;
1509 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001510
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001511 /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail
1512 /// call.
1513 SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls;
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001514 if (PN) {
1515 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
1516 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I));
1517 // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call.
1518 if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) &&
1519 TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI))
1520 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
1521 }
1522 } else {
1523 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001524 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) {
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00001525 if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001526 continue;
1527
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001528 BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList();
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001529 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin();
1530 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend();
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00001531 do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI));
1532 if (RI == RE)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001533 continue;
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00001534
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001535 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI);
Cameron Zwarich2edfe772011-03-24 15:54:11 +00001536 if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI))
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001537 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
1538 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001539 }
1540
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001541 bool Changed = false;
1542 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) {
1543 CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i];
1544 CallSite CS(CI);
1545
1546 // Conservatively require the attributes of the call to match those of the
1547 // return. Ignore noalias because it doesn't affect the call sequence.
Bill Wendling658d24d2013-01-18 21:53:16 +00001548 AttributeSet CalleeAttrs = CS.getAttributes();
1549 if (AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeSet::ReturnIndex).
Bill Wendling3d7b0b82012-12-19 07:18:57 +00001550 removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias) !=
Bill Wendling658d24d2013-01-18 21:53:16 +00001551 AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeSet::ReturnIndex).
Bill Wendling3d7b0b82012-12-19 07:18:57 +00001552 removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001553 continue;
1554
1555 // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to
1556 // the return block.
1557 BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent();
1558 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator());
1559 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
1560 continue;
1561
1562 // Duplicate the return into CallBB.
1563 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, CallBB);
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +00001564 ModifiedDT = Changed = true;
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001565 ++NumRetsDup;
1566 }
1567
1568 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +00001569 if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001570 BB->eraseFromParent();
1571
1572 return Changed;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001573}
1574
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00001575//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00001576// Memory Optimization
1577//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1578
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001579namespace {
1580
1581/// ExtAddrMode - This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode
1582/// which holds actual Value*'s for register values.
Chandler Carruth95f83e02013-01-07 15:14:13 +00001583struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001584 Value *BaseReg;
1585 Value *ScaledReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001586 ExtAddrMode() : BaseReg(nullptr), ScaledReg(nullptr) {}
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001587 void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
1588 void dump() const;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00001589
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001590 bool operator==(const ExtAddrMode& O) const {
1591 return (BaseReg == O.BaseReg) && (ScaledReg == O.ScaledReg) &&
1592 (BaseGV == O.BaseGV) && (BaseOffs == O.BaseOffs) &&
1593 (HasBaseReg == O.HasBaseReg) && (Scale == O.Scale);
1594 }
1595};
1596
Eli Friedmanc1f1f852013-09-10 23:09:24 +00001597#ifndef NDEBUG
1598static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) {
1599 AM.print(OS);
1600 return OS;
1601}
1602#endif
1603
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001604void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const {
1605 bool NeedPlus = false;
1606 OS << "[";
1607 if (BaseGV) {
1608 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1609 << "GV:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00001610 BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001611 NeedPlus = true;
1612 }
1613
Richard Trieuc0f91212014-05-30 03:15:17 +00001614 if (BaseOffs) {
1615 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1616 << BaseOffs;
1617 NeedPlus = true;
1618 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001619
1620 if (BaseReg) {
1621 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1622 << "Base:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00001623 BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001624 NeedPlus = true;
1625 }
1626 if (Scale) {
1627 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1628 << Scale << "*";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00001629 ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001630 }
1631
1632 OS << ']';
1633}
1634
1635#if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP)
1636void ExtAddrMode::dump() const {
1637 print(dbgs());
1638 dbgs() << '\n';
1639}
1640#endif
1641
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001642/// \brief This class provides transaction based operation on the IR.
1643/// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and
1644/// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called.
1645class TypePromotionTransaction {
1646
1647 /// \brief This represents the common interface of the individual transaction.
1648 /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on
1649 /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction.
1650 class TypePromotionAction {
1651 protected:
1652 /// The Instruction modified.
1653 Instruction *Inst;
1654
1655 public:
1656 /// \brief Constructor of the action.
1657 /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR.
1658 TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {}
1659
1660 virtual ~TypePromotionAction() {}
1661
1662 /// \brief Undo the modification done by this action.
1663 /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was
1664 /// before this action was applied.
1665 /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same
1666 /// state as it was directly after this action was applied.
1667 virtual void undo() = 0;
1668
1669 /// \brief Advocate every change made by this action.
1670 /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important
1671 /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever.
1672 virtual void commit() {
1673 // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything.
1674 }
1675 };
1676
1677 /// \brief Utility to remember the position of an instruction.
1678 class InsertionHandler {
1679 /// Position of an instruction.
1680 /// Either an instruction:
1681 /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used.
1682 /// - Has a previous instructon: PrevInst is used.
1683 union {
1684 Instruction *PrevInst;
1685 BasicBlock *BB;
1686 } Point;
1687 /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction.
1688 bool HasPrevInstruction;
1689
1690 public:
1691 /// \brief Record the position of \p Inst.
1692 InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) {
1693 BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst;
1694 HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin()));
1695 if (HasPrevInstruction)
1696 Point.PrevInst = --It;
1697 else
1698 Point.BB = Inst->getParent();
1699 }
1700
1701 /// \brief Insert \p Inst at the recorded position.
1702 void insert(Instruction *Inst) {
1703 if (HasPrevInstruction) {
1704 if (Inst->getParent())
1705 Inst->removeFromParent();
1706 Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst);
1707 } else {
1708 Instruction *Position = Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1709 if (Inst->getParent())
1710 Inst->moveBefore(Position);
1711 else
1712 Inst->insertBefore(Position);
1713 }
1714 }
1715 };
1716
1717 /// \brief Move an instruction before another.
1718 class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction {
1719 /// Original position of the instruction.
1720 InsertionHandler Position;
1721
1722 public:
1723 /// \brief Move \p Inst before \p Before.
1724 InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before)
1725 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) {
1726 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before << "\n");
1727 Inst->moveBefore(Before);
1728 }
1729
1730 /// \brief Move the instruction back to its original position.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001731 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001732 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n");
1733 Position.insert(Inst);
1734 }
1735 };
1736
1737 /// \brief Set the operand of an instruction with a new value.
1738 class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction {
1739 /// Original operand of the instruction.
1740 Value *Origin;
1741 /// Index of the modified instruction.
1742 unsigned Idx;
1743
1744 public:
1745 /// \brief Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal.
1746 OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal)
1747 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) {
1748 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n"
1749 << "for:" << *Inst << "\n"
1750 << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n");
1751 Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx);
1752 Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal);
1753 }
1754
1755 /// \brief Restore the original value of the instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001756 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001757 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n"
1758 << "for: " << *Inst << "\n"
1759 << "with: " << *Origin << "\n");
1760 Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin);
1761 }
1762 };
1763
1764 /// \brief Hide the operands of an instruction.
1765 /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands.
1766 class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction {
1767 /// The list of original operands.
1768 SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues;
1769
1770 public:
1771 /// \brief Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst.
1772 OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
1773 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
1774 unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands();
1775 OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds);
1776 for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) {
1777 // Save the current operand.
1778 Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It);
1779 OriginalValues.push_back(Val);
1780 // Set a dummy one.
1781 // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would implied an overhead
1782 // that we are not willing to pay.
1783 Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType()));
1784 }
1785 }
1786
1787 /// \brief Restore the original list of uses.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001788 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001789 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
1790 for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It)
1791 Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]);
1792 }
1793 };
1794
1795 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction.
1796 class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001797 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001798 public:
1799 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
1800 /// result.
1801 /// trunc Opnd to Ty.
1802 TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) {
1803 IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001804 Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
1805 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001806 }
1807
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001808 /// \brief Get the built value.
1809 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001810
1811 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001812 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001813 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
1814 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
1815 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001816 }
1817 };
1818
1819 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction.
1820 class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001821 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001822 public:
1823 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
1824 /// result.
1825 /// sext Opnd to Ty.
1826 SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001827 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001828 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001829 Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
1830 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001831 }
1832
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001833 /// \brief Get the built value.
1834 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001835
1836 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001837 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001838 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
1839 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
1840 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001841 }
1842 };
1843
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001844 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction.
1845 class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001846 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001847 public:
1848 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
1849 /// result.
1850 /// zext Opnd to Ty.
1851 ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001852 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001853 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001854 Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
1855 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001856 }
1857
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001858 /// \brief Get the built value.
1859 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001860
1861 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
1862 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001863 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
1864 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
1865 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001866 }
1867 };
1868
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001869 /// \brief Mutate an instruction to another type.
1870 class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction {
1871 /// Record the original type.
1872 Type *OrigTy;
1873
1874 public:
1875 /// \brief Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy.
1876 TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy)
1877 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) {
1878 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy
1879 << "\n");
1880 Inst->mutateType(NewTy);
1881 }
1882
1883 /// \brief Mutate the instruction back to its original type.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001884 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001885 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy
1886 << "\n");
1887 Inst->mutateType(OrigTy);
1888 }
1889 };
1890
1891 /// \brief Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction.
1892 class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction {
1893 /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses.
1894 struct InstructionAndIdx {
1895 /// The instruction using the instruction.
1896 Instruction *Inst;
1897 /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst.
1898 unsigned Idx;
1899 InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx)
1900 : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {}
1901 };
1902
1903 /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index).
1904 SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses;
1905 typedef SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator use_iterator;
1906
1907 public:
1908 /// \brief Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New.
1909 UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
1910 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New
1911 << "\n");
1912 // Record the original uses.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001913 for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) {
1914 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
1915 OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001916 }
1917 // Now, we can replace the uses.
1918 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New);
1919 }
1920
1921 /// \brief Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001922 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001923 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n");
1924 for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(),
1925 EndIt = OriginalUses.end();
1926 UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) {
1927 UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst);
1928 }
1929 }
1930 };
1931
1932 /// \brief Remove an instruction from the IR.
1933 class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction {
1934 /// Original position of the instruction.
1935 InsertionHandler Inserter;
1936 /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other
1937 /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed.
1938 OperandsHider Hider;
1939 /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any.
1940 UsesReplacer *Replacer;
1941
1942 public:
1943 /// \brief Remove all reference of \p Inst and optinally replace all its
1944 /// uses with New.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001945 /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr
1946 InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, Value *New = nullptr)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001947 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst),
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001948 Replacer(nullptr) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001949 if (New)
1950 Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New);
1951 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
1952 Inst->removeFromParent();
1953 }
1954
Alexander Kornienkof817c1c2015-04-11 02:11:45 +00001955 ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001956
1957 /// \brief Really remove the instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001958 void commit() override { delete Inst; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001959
1960 /// \brief Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if
1961 /// new value was provided when build this action.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001962 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001963 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
1964 Inserter.insert(Inst);
1965 if (Replacer)
1966 Replacer->undo();
1967 Hider.undo();
1968 }
1969 };
1970
1971public:
1972 /// Restoration point.
1973 /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator
1974 /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer.
1975 typedef const TypePromotionAction *ConstRestorationPt;
1976 /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction.
1977 void commit();
1978 /// Undo all the changes made after the given point.
1979 void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point);
1980 /// Get the current restoration point.
1981 ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const;
1982
1983 /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback.
1984 /// @{
1985 /// Same as Instruction::setOperand.
1986 void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal);
1987 /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001988 void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001989 /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith.
1990 void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New);
1991 /// Same as Value::mutateType.
1992 void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy);
1993 /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001994 Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001995 /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001996 Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001997 /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001998 Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001999 /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore.
2000 void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before);
2001 /// @}
2002
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002003private:
2004 /// The ordered list of actions made so far.
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002005 SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions;
2006 typedef SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator CommitPt;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002007};
2008
2009void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx,
2010 Value *NewVal) {
2011 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002012 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>(Inst, Idx, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002013}
2014
2015void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst,
2016 Value *NewVal) {
2017 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002018 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>(Inst, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002019}
2020
2021void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst,
2022 Value *New) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002023 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002024}
2025
2026void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002027 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002028}
2029
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002030Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd,
2031 Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002032 std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002033 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002034 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002035 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002036}
2037
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002038Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst,
2039 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002040 std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002041 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002042 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002043 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002044}
2045
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002046Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst,
2047 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002048 std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002049 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002050 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002051 return Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002052}
2053
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002054void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst,
2055 Instruction *Before) {
2056 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002057 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>(Inst, Before));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002058}
2059
2060TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt
2061TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002062 return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002063}
2064
2065void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() {
2066 for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt;
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002067 ++It)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002068 (*It)->commit();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002069 Actions.clear();
2070}
2071
2072void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback(
2073 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002074 while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) {
2075 std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002076 Curr->undo();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002077 }
2078}
2079
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002080/// \brief A helper class for matching addressing modes.
2081///
2082/// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes.
2083class AddressingModeMatcher {
2084 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts;
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002085 const TargetMachine &TM;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002086 const TargetLowering &TLI;
2087
2088 /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and
2089 /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for.
2090 Type *AccessTy;
2091 Instruction *MemoryInst;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002092
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002093 /// AddrMode - This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is
2094 /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff.
2095 ExtAddrMode &AddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002096
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002097 /// The truncate instruction inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations.
2098 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedTruncs;
2099 /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion.
2100 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts;
2101 /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
2102 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT;
2103
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002104 /// IgnoreProfitability - This is set to true when we should not do
2105 /// profitability checks. When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode
2106 /// always returns true.
2107 bool IgnoreProfitability;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002108
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002109 AddressingModeMatcher(SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI,
2110 const TargetMachine &TM, Type *AT, Instruction *MI,
2111 ExtAddrMode &AM, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedTruncs,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002112 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2113 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT)
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002114 : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TM(TM),
2115 TLI(*TM.getSubtargetImpl(*MI->getParent()->getParent())
2116 ->getTargetLowering()),
2117 AccessTy(AT), MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM),
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002118 InsertedTruncs(InsertedTruncs), PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002119 IgnoreProfitability = false;
2120 }
2121public:
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002122
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002123 /// Match - Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold,
2124 /// give an access type of AccessTy. This returns a list of involved
2125 /// instructions in AddrModeInsts.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002126 /// \p InsertedTruncs The truncate instruction inserted by other
2127 /// CodeGenPrepare
2128 /// optimizations.
2129 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
2130 /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002131 static ExtAddrMode Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy,
2132 Instruction *MemoryInst,
2133 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts,
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002134 const TargetMachine &TM,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002135 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedTruncs,
2136 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2137 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002138 ExtAddrMode Result;
2139
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002140 bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TM, AccessTy,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002141 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedTruncs,
2142 PromotedInsts, TPT).MatchAddr(V, 0);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002143 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
2144 return Result;
2145 }
2146private:
2147 bool MatchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth);
2148 bool MatchAddr(Value *V, unsigned Depth);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002149 bool MatchOperationAddr(User *Operation, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth,
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002150 bool *MovedAway = nullptr);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002151 bool IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I,
2152 ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
2153 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter);
2154 bool ValueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2);
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002155 bool IsPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost,
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002156 Value *PromotedOperand) const;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002157};
2158
2159/// MatchScaledValue - Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode.
2160/// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target,
2161/// false if not.
2162bool AddressingModeMatcher::MatchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale,
2163 unsigned Depth) {
2164 // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing
2165 // mode. Just process that directly.
2166 if (Scale == 1)
2167 return MatchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002168
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002169 // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this.
2170 if (Scale == 0)
2171 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002172
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002173 // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we
2174 // need an available scale field.
2175 if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg)
2176 return false;
2177
2178 ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode;
2179
2180 // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7. This could also do things like
2181 // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8].
2182 TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale;
2183 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg;
2184
2185 // If the new address isn't legal, bail out.
2186 if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(TestAddrMode, AccessTy))
2187 return false;
2188
2189 // It was legal, so commit it.
2190 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002191
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002192 // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode. Check now
2193 // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C. If so, we can turn this into adding
2194 // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002195 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002196 if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) && // not a constant expr.
2197 match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) {
2198 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS;
2199 TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002200
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002201 // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded
2202 // this instruction.
2203 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(TestAddrMode, AccessTy)) {
2204 AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg));
2205 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
2206 return true;
2207 }
2208 }
2209
2210 // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have.
2211 return true;
2212}
2213
2214/// MightBeFoldableInst - This is a little filter, which returns true if an
2215/// addressing computation involving I might be folded into a load/store
2216/// accessing it. This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least
2217/// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can.
2218static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) {
2219 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
2220 case Instruction::BitCast:
Eli Benderskyf13a0562014-05-22 00:02:52 +00002221 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002222 // Don't touch identity bitcasts.
2223 if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType())
2224 return false;
2225 return I->getType()->isPointerTy() || I->getType()->isIntegerTy();
2226 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
2227 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
2228 return true;
2229 case Instruction::IntToPtr:
2230 // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable.
2231 return true;
2232 case Instruction::Add:
2233 return true;
2234 case Instruction::Mul:
2235 case Instruction::Shl:
2236 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
2237 return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
2238 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
2239 return true;
2240 default:
2241 return false;
2242 }
2243}
2244
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002245/// \brief Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI.
2246/// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion.
2247/// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed
2248/// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state.
2249static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI, Value *Val) {
2250 Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val);
2251 if (!PromotedInst)
2252 return false;
2253 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode());
2254 // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion.
2255 if (!ISDOpcode)
2256 return true;
2257 // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not.
2258 return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
2259 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(PromotedInst->getType()));
2260}
2261
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002262/// \brief Hepler class to perform type promotion.
2263class TypePromotionHelper {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002264 /// \brief Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension
2265 /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by
2266 /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst.
2267 /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002268 /// In other words, check if:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002269 /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002270 /// #1 Promotion applies:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002271 /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...).
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002272 /// #2 Operand reuses:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002273 /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002274 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002275 static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType,
2276 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002277
2278 /// \brief Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when
2279 /// promoting \p Inst.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002280 static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002281 if (isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0)
2282 return false;
2283 return true;
2284 }
2285
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002286 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002287 /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002288 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002289 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002290 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002291 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
2292 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002293 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002294 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002295 static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
2296 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002297 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002298 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002299 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002300
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002301 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002302 /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext.
2303 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002304 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002305 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002306 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
2307 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002308 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002309 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002310 static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext,
2311 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2312 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2313 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
2314 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
2315 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
2316 const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002317
2318 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002319 static Value *signExtendOperandForOther(
2320 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2321 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
2322 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
2323 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
2324 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
2325 Exts, Truncs, TLI, true);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002326 }
2327
2328 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002329 static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther(
2330 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2331 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
2332 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
2333 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
2334 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
2335 Exts, Truncs, TLI, false);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002336 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002337
2338public:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002339 /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext.
2340 typedef Value *(*Action)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002341 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2342 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002343 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002344 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
2345 const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002346 /// \brief Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the approriate
2347 /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002348 /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current
2349 /// sign extension.
2350 /// \p InsertedTruncs keeps track of all the truncate instructions inserted by
2351 /// the others CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important
2352 /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare
2353 /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove.
2354 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002355 static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedTruncs,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002356 const TargetLowering &TLI,
2357 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts);
2358};
2359
2360bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst,
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002361 Type *ConsideredExtType,
2362 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2363 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002364 // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet.
2365 // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we
2366 // statically extend, e.g., constants and such.
2367 if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy())
2368 return false;
2369
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002370 // We can always get through zext.
2371 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst))
2372 return true;
2373
2374 // sext(sext) is ok too.
2375 if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002376 return true;
2377
2378 // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the
2379 // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag.
2380 const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst);
2381 if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) &&
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002382 ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) ||
2383 (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap())))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002384 return true;
2385
2386 // Check if we can do the following simplification.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002387 // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002388 if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst))
2389 return false;
2390
2391 Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002392 // Check if we can use this operand in the extension.
2393 // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002394 // we cannot.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002395 if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
2396 OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
2397 ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth())
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002398 return false;
2399
2400 // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have
2401 // any information on the dropped bits.
2402 // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic).
2403 Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal);
2404 if (!Opnd)
2405 return false;
2406
2407 // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002408 // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of
2409 // the extension.
2410 // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002411 const Type *OpndType;
2412 InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002413 if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.IsSExt == IsSExt)
2414 OpndType = It->second.Ty;
2415 else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd)))
2416 OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002417 else
2418 return false;
2419
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002420 // #2 check that the truncate just drop extended bits.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002421 if (Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >= OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth())
2422 return true;
2423
2424 return false;
2425}
2426
2427TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction(
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002428 Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedTruncs,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002429 const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002430 assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) &&
2431 "Unexpected instruction type");
2432 Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
2433 Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType();
2434 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext);
2435 // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002436 // get through.
2437 // If it, check we can get through.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002438 if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002439 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002440
2441 // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare.
2442 // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be
2443 // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002444 if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedTruncs.count(ExtOpnd))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002445 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002446
2447 // SExt or Trunc instructions.
2448 // Return the related handler.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002449 if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) ||
2450 isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002451 return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002452
2453 // Regular instruction.
2454 // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002455 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType()))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002456 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002457 return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002458}
2459
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002460Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002461 llvm::Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002462 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002463 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002464 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002465 // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
2466 // get through it and this method should not be called.
2467 Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002468 Value *ExtVal = SExt;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002469 bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002470 if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002471 // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002472 // => zext(opnd).
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002473 HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002474 Value *ZExt =
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002475 TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType());
2476 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt);
2477 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002478 ExtVal = ZExt;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002479 } else {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002480 // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd))
2481 // => z|sext(opnd).
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002482 TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0));
2483 }
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002484 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002485
2486 // Remove dead code.
2487 if (SExtOpnd->use_empty())
2488 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd);
2489
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00002490 // Check if the extension is still needed.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002491 Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002492 if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) {
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002493 if (ExtInst) {
2494 if (Exts)
2495 Exts->push_back(ExtInst);
2496 CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt;
2497 }
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002498 return ExtVal;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002499 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002500
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00002501 // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty.
2502 // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst.
2503 Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0);
2504 TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002505 return NextVal;
2506}
2507
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002508Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther(
2509 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002510 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002511 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002512 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI,
2513 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002514 // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002515 // get through it and this method should not be called.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002516 Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002517 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002518 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) {
2519 // ExtOpnd will be promoted.
2520 // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002521 // promoted version.
2522 // Create the truncate now.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002523 Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType());
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002524 if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) {
2525 ITrunc->removeFromParent();
2526 // Insert it just after the definition.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002527 ITrunc->insertAfter(ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002528 if (Truncs)
2529 Truncs->push_back(ITrunc);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002530 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002531
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002532 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc);
2533 // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replace by the previous call
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002534 // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002535 TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002536 }
2537
2538 // Get through the Instruction:
2539 // 1. Update its type.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002540 // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst.
2541 // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002542
2543 // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion.
2544 // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002545 PromotedInsts.insert(std::pair<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>(
2546 ExtOpnd, TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), IsSExt)));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002547 // Step #1.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002548 TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType());
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002549 // Step #2.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002550 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002551 // Step #3.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002552 Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002553
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002554 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n");
2555 for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002556 ++OpIdx) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002557 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n');
2558 if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() ||
2559 !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002560 DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n");
2561 continue;
2562 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002563 // Check if we can statically extend the operand.
2564 Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002565 if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002566 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
2567 unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
2568 APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth)
2569 : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth);
2570 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002571 continue;
2572 }
2573 // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them.
2574 if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002575 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
2576 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002577 continue;
2578 }
2579
2580 // Otherwise we have to explicity sign extend the operand.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002581 // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand.
2582 if (!ExtForOpnd) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002583 // If yes, create a new one.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002584 DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n");
Quentin Colombet84f89cc2014-12-22 18:11:52 +00002585 Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType())
2586 : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType());
2587 if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) {
2588 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd);
2589 continue;
2590 }
2591 ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002592 }
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002593 if (Exts)
2594 Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002595 TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002596
2597 // Move the sign extension before the insertion point.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002598 TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd);
2599 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002600 CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002601 // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002602 ExtForOpnd = nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002603 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002604 if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) {
2605 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n");
2606 TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002607 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002608 return ExtOpnd;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002609}
2610
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002611/// IsPromotionProfitable - Check whether or not promoting an instruction
2612/// to a wider type was profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002613/// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the
2614/// promotion.
2615/// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion
2616/// plus the number of instructions that have been
2617/// matched in the addressing mode the promotion.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002618/// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted.
2619/// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002620bool AddressingModeMatcher::IsPromotionProfitable(
2621 unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const {
2622 DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost << '\n');
2623 // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the
2624 // old extension plus what we folded.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002625 // This is not profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002626 if (NewCost > OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002627 return false;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002628 if (NewCost < OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002629 return true;
2630 // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in
2631 // loads for instance.
2632 // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002633 return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, PromotedOperand);
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002634}
2635
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002636/// MatchOperationAddr - Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can
2637/// fold the operation into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing
2638/// mode and return true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002639/// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or
2640/// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success.
2641/// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing
2642/// because it has been moved away.
2643/// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions.
2644/// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away.
2645/// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must
2646/// not be referenced anymore.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002647bool AddressingModeMatcher::MatchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002648 unsigned Depth,
2649 bool *MovedAway) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002650 // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees.
2651 if (Depth >= 5) return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002652
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002653 // By default, all matched instructions stay in place.
2654 if (MovedAway)
2655 *MovedAway = false;
2656
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002657 switch (Opcode) {
2658 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
2659 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
2660 return MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
2661 case Instruction::IntToPtr:
2662 // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized.
2663 if (TLI.getValueType(AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) ==
Matt Arsenault37d42ec2013-09-06 00:18:43 +00002664 TLI.getPointerTy(AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace()))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002665 return MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
2666 return false;
2667 case Instruction::BitCast:
Eli Benderskyf13a0562014-05-22 00:02:52 +00002668 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002669 // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is
2670 // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something).
2671 if ((AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isPointerTy() ||
2672 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntegerTy()) &&
2673 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. These were probably put here by LSR,
2674 // and we don't want to mess around with them. Assume it knows what it
2675 // is doing.
2676 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType())
2677 return MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
2678 return false;
2679 case Instruction::Add: {
2680 // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS. If so, we win.
2681 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2682 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002683 // Start a transaction at this point.
2684 // The LHS may match but not the RHS.
2685 // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially
2686 // matched operation.
2687 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
2688 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
2689
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002690 if (MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) &&
2691 MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
2692 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002693
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002694 // Restore the old addr mode info.
2695 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2696 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002697 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002698
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002699 // Otherwise this was over-aggressive. Try merging in the LHS then the RHS.
2700 if (MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) &&
2701 MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1))
2702 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002703
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002704 // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in.
2705 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2706 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002707 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002708 break;
2709 }
2710 //case Instruction::Or:
2711 // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD.
2712 //break;
2713 case Instruction::Mul:
2714 case Instruction::Shl: {
2715 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
2716 ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1));
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00002717 if (!RHS)
2718 return false;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002719 int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue();
2720 if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl)
2721 Scale = 1LL << Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002722
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002723 return MatchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth);
2724 }
2725 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: {
2726 // Scan the GEP. We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most
2727 // one variable offset.
2728 int VariableOperand = -1;
2729 unsigned VariableScale = 0;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002730
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002731 int64_t ConstantOffset = 0;
2732 const DataLayout *TD = TLI.getDataLayout();
2733 gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst);
2734 for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) {
2735 if (StructType *STy = dyn_cast<StructType>(*GTI)) {
2736 const StructLayout *SL = TD->getStructLayout(STy);
2737 unsigned Idx =
2738 cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue();
2739 ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx);
2740 } else {
2741 uint64_t TypeSize = TD->getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType());
2742 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) {
2743 ConstantOffset += CI->getSExtValue()*TypeSize;
2744 } else if (TypeSize) { // Scales of zero don't do anything.
2745 // We only allow one variable index at the moment.
2746 if (VariableOperand != -1)
2747 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002748
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002749 // Remember the variable index.
2750 VariableOperand = i;
2751 VariableScale = TypeSize;
2752 }
2753 }
2754 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002755
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002756 // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset. In this case,
2757 // just add it to the disp field and check validity.
2758 if (VariableOperand == -1) {
2759 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
2760 if (ConstantOffset == 0 || TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(AddrMode, AccessTy)){
2761 // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too.
2762 if (MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
2763 return true;
2764 }
2765 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset;
2766 return false;
2767 }
2768
2769 // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match.
2770 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2771 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
2772
2773 // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target.
2774 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
2775
2776 // Match the base operand of the GEP.
2777 if (!MatchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) {
2778 // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register.
2779 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
2780 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2781 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2782 return false;
2783 }
2784 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
2785 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
2786 }
2787
2788 // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP.
2789 if (!MatchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale,
2790 Depth)) {
2791 // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register
2792 // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale.
2793 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2794 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2795 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg)
2796 return false;
2797 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
2798 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
2799 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
2800 if (!MatchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand),
2801 VariableScale, Depth)) {
2802 // If even that didn't work, bail.
2803 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2804 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2805 return false;
2806 }
2807 }
2808
2809 return true;
2810 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002811 case Instruction::SExt:
2812 case Instruction::ZExt: {
2813 Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst);
2814 if (!Ext)
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00002815 return false;
Sanjay Patelab60d042014-07-16 21:08:10 +00002816
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002817 // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002818 // Ask for a method for doing so.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002819 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
2820 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedTruncs, TLI, PromotedInsts);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002821 if (!TPH)
2822 return false;
2823
2824 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
2825 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002826 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0;
2827 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002828 Value *PromotedOperand =
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002829 TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002830 // SExt has been moved away.
2831 // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is
2832 // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point.
2833 // E.g.,
2834 // op = add opnd, 1
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002835 // idx = ext op
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002836 // addr = gep base, idx
2837 // is now:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002838 // promotedOpnd = ext opnd <- no match here
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002839 // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1 <- match (later in recursive calls)
2840 // addr = gep base, op <- match
2841 if (MovedAway)
2842 *MovedAway = true;
2843
2844 assert(PromotedOperand &&
2845 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
2846
2847 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2848 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
2849
2850 if (!MatchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) ||
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002851 // The total of the new cost is equals to the cost of the created
2852 // instructions.
2853 // The total of the old cost is equals to the cost of the extension plus
2854 // what we have saved in the addressing mode.
2855 !IsPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost,
2856 ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize),
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002857 PromotedOperand)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002858 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2859 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2860 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n");
2861 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
2862 return false;
2863 }
2864 return true;
2865 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002866 }
2867 return false;
2868}
2869
2870/// MatchAddr - If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current
2871/// addressing mode. If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and
2872/// leaves AddrMode unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type
2873/// or intptr_t for the target.
2874///
2875bool AddressingModeMatcher::MatchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002876 // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching
2877 // fails.
2878 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
2879 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002880 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) {
2881 // Fold in immediates if legal for the target.
2882 AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue();
2883 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(AddrMode, AccessTy))
2884 return true;
2885 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue();
2886 } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) {
2887 // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002888 if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002889 AddrMode.BaseGV = GV;
2890 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(AddrMode, AccessTy))
2891 return true;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002892 AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002893 }
2894 } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) {
2895 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2896 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
2897
2898 // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002899 bool MovedAway = false;
2900 if (MatchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) {
2901 // This instruction may have been move away. If so, there is nothing
2902 // to check here.
2903 if (MovedAway)
2904 return true;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002905 // Okay, it's possible to fold this. Check to see if it is actually
2906 // *profitable* to do so. We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing
2907 // register pressure too much.
2908 if (I->hasOneUse() ||
2909 IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) {
2910 AddrModeInsts.push_back(I);
2911 return true;
2912 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002913
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002914 // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back.
2915 //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I;
2916 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2917 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002918 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002919 }
2920 } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) {
2921 if (MatchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth))
2922 return true;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002923 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002924 } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) {
2925 // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode.
2926 return true;
2927 }
2928
2929 // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :)
2930 if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
2931 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
2932 AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr;
2933 // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r].
2934 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(AddrMode, AccessTy))
2935 return true;
2936 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002937 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002938 }
2939
2940 // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r].
2941 if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) {
2942 AddrMode.Scale = 1;
2943 AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr;
2944 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(AddrMode, AccessTy))
2945 return true;
2946 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002947 AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002948 }
2949 // Couldn't match.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002950 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002951 return false;
2952}
2953
2954/// IsOperandAMemoryOperand - Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified
2955/// inline asm call are due to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise
2956/// return false.
2957static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal,
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00002958 const TargetMachine &TM) {
2959 const Function *F = CI->getParent()->getParent();
2960 const TargetLowering *TLI = TM.getSubtargetImpl(*F)->getTargetLowering();
2961 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI = TM.getSubtargetImpl(*F)->getRegisterInfo();
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002962 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00002963 TLI->ParseConstraints(TRI, ImmutableCallSite(CI));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002964 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
2965 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002966
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002967 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00002968 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002969
2970 // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory
2971 // operand, we can't fold it!
2972 if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal &&
2973 (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory ||
2974 !OpInfo.isIndirect))
2975 return false;
2976 }
2977
2978 return true;
2979}
2980
2981/// FindAllMemoryUses - Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a
2982/// memory use. If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true.
2983/// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00002984static bool FindAllMemoryUses(
2985 Instruction *I,
2986 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses,
2987 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts, const TargetMachine &TM) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002988 // If we already considered this instruction, we're done.
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00002989 if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002990 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002991
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002992 // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out.
2993 if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I))
2994 return true;
2995
2996 // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002997 for (Use &U : I->uses()) {
2998 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002999
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003000 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) {
3001 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo()));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003002 continue;
3003 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003004
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003005 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) {
3006 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003007 if (opNo == 0) return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
3008 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo));
3009 continue;
3010 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003011
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003012 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003013 InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue());
3014 if (!IA) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003015
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003016 // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003017 if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TM))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003018 return true;
3019 continue;
3020 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003021
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003022 if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TM))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003023 return true;
3024 }
3025
3026 return false;
3027}
3028
3029/// ValueAlreadyLiveAtInst - Retrn true if Val is already known to be live at
3030/// the use site that we're folding it into. If so, there is no cost to
3031/// include it in the addressing mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values
3032/// that we know are live at the instruction already.
3033bool AddressingModeMatcher::ValueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1,
3034 Value *KnownLive2) {
3035 // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live!
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003036 if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003037 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003038
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003039 // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live.
3040 if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003041
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003042 // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is
3043 // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is
3044 // live for the whole function.
3045 if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val))
3046 if (AI->isStaticAlloca())
3047 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003048
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003049 // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's
3050 // block. If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we
3051 // can reasonably fold it.
3052 return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent());
3053}
3054
3055/// IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode - It is possible for the addressing
3056/// mode of the machine to fold the specified instruction into a load or store
3057/// that ultimately uses it. However, the specified instruction has multiple
3058/// uses. Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it
3059/// into the load. For example, consider this code:
3060///
3061/// X = ...
3062/// Y = X+1
3063/// use(Y) -> nonload/store
3064/// Z = Y+1
3065/// load Z
3066///
3067/// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z
3068/// (yielding load [X+2]). However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to
3069/// be live at the use(Y) line. If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one
3070/// fewer register. Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the
3071/// number of computations either.
3072///
3073/// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic. If
3074/// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to
3075/// fold the addressing mode in the Z case. This would make Y die earlier.
3076bool AddressingModeMatcher::
3077IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
3078 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) {
3079 if (IgnoreProfitability) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003080
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003081 // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it,
3082 // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded. Get
3083 // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those
3084 // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this
3085 // address extends the lifetime of.
3086 //
3087 // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here,
3088 // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any
3089 // folded immediates).
3090 Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003091
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003092 // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their
3093 // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction.
3094 if (ValueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003095 BaseReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003096 if (ValueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003097 ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003098
3099 // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live
3100 // ranges, we're ok with it.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003101 if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003102 return true;
3103
3104 // If all uses of this instruction are ultimately load/store/inlineasm's,
3105 // check to see if their addressing modes will include this instruction. If
3106 // so, we can fold it into all uses, so it doesn't matter if it has multiple
3107 // uses.
3108 SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses;
3109 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts;
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003110 if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TM))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003111 return false; // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use!
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003112
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003113 // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of
3114 // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded
3115 // into a memory use, loop over each of these uses and see if they could
3116 // *actually* fold the instruction.
3117 SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts;
3118 for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3119 Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first;
3120 unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003121
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003122 // Get the access type of this use. If the use isn't a pointer, we don't
3123 // know what it accesses.
3124 Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo);
3125 if (!Address->getType()->isPointerTy())
3126 return false;
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003127 Type *AddressAccessTy = Address->getType()->getPointerElementType();
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003128
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003129 // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This
3130 // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will
3131 // *actually* cover the shared instruction.
3132 ExtAddrMode Result;
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00003133 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3134 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00003135 AddressingModeMatcher Matcher(MatchedAddrModeInsts, TM, AddressAccessTy,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003136 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedTruncs,
3137 PromotedInsts, TPT);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003138 Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true;
3139 bool Success = Matcher.MatchAddr(Address, 0);
3140 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
3141
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00003142 // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not
3143 // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped
3144 // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state.
3145 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3146
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003147 // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it.
3148 if (std::find(MatchedAddrModeInsts.begin(), MatchedAddrModeInsts.end(),
3149 I) == MatchedAddrModeInsts.end())
3150 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003151
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003152 MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear();
3153 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003154
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003155 return true;
3156}
3157
3158} // end anonymous namespace
3159
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003160/// IsNonLocalValue - Return true if the specified values are defined in a
3161/// different basic block than BB.
3162static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) {
3163 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V))
3164 return I->getParent() != BB;
3165 return false;
3166}
3167
Bob Wilson53bdae32009-12-03 21:47:07 +00003168/// OptimizeMemoryInst - Load and Store Instructions often have
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003169/// addressing modes that can do significant amounts of computation. As such,
3170/// instruction selection will try to get the load or store to do as much
3171/// computation as possible for the program. The problem is that isel can only
3172/// see within a single block. As such, we sink as much legal addressing mode
3173/// stuff into the block as possible.
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00003174///
3175/// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory
3176/// operands.
Chris Lattner6d71b7f2008-11-26 03:20:37 +00003177bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr,
Chris Lattner229907c2011-07-18 04:54:35 +00003178 Type *AccessTy) {
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003179 Value *Repl = Addr;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003180
3181 // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes. This is necessary to undo
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003182 // unprofitable PRE transformations.
Cameron Zwarich43cecb12011-01-03 06:33:01 +00003183 SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist;
3184 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003185 worklist.push_back(Addr);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003186
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003187 // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI nodes, and ensure that
3188 // the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI roots of the graph
3189 // are equivalent.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003190 Value *Consensus = nullptr;
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00003191 unsigned NumUsesConsensus = 0;
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00003192 bool IsNumUsesConsensusValid = false;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003193 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts;
3194 ExtAddrMode AddrMode;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003195 TypePromotionTransaction TPT;
3196 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3197 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003198 while (!worklist.empty()) {
3199 Value *V = worklist.back();
3200 worklist.pop_back();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003201
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003202 // Break use-def graph loops.
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00003203 if (!Visited.insert(V).second) {
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003204 Consensus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003205 break;
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003206 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003207
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003208 // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values.
3209 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) {
3210 for (unsigned i = 0, e = P->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
3211 worklist.push_back(P->getIncomingValue(i));
3212 continue;
3213 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003214
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003215 // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed.
3216 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> NewAddrModeInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003217 ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match(
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00003218 V, AccessTy, MemoryInst, NewAddrModeInsts, *TM, InsertedTruncsSet,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003219 PromotedInsts, TPT);
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00003220
3221 // This check is broken into two cases with very similar code to avoid using
3222 // getNumUses() as much as possible. Some values have a lot of uses, so
3223 // calling getNumUses() unconditionally caused a significant compile-time
3224 // regression.
3225 if (!Consensus) {
3226 Consensus = V;
3227 AddrMode = NewAddrMode;
3228 AddrModeInsts = NewAddrModeInsts;
3229 continue;
3230 } else if (NewAddrMode == AddrMode) {
3231 if (!IsNumUsesConsensusValid) {
3232 NumUsesConsensus = Consensus->getNumUses();
3233 IsNumUsesConsensusValid = true;
3234 }
3235
3236 // Ensure that the obtained addressing mode is equivalent to that obtained
3237 // for all other roots of the PHI traversal. Also, when choosing one
3238 // such root as representative, select the one with the most uses in order
3239 // to keep the cost modeling heuristics in AddressingModeMatcher
3240 // applicable.
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00003241 unsigned NumUses = V->getNumUses();
3242 if (NumUses > NumUsesConsensus) {
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003243 Consensus = V;
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00003244 NumUsesConsensus = NumUses;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003245 AddrModeInsts = NewAddrModeInsts;
3246 }
3247 continue;
3248 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003249
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003250 Consensus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003251 break;
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003252 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003253
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003254 // If the addressing mode couldn't be determined, or if multiple different
3255 // ones were determined, bail out now.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003256 if (!Consensus) {
3257 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3258 return false;
3259 }
3260 TPT.commit();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003261
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003262 // Check to see if any of the instructions supersumed by this addr mode are
3263 // non-local to I's BB.
3264 bool AnyNonLocal = false;
3265 for (unsigned i = 0, e = AddrModeInsts.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner6d71b7f2008-11-26 03:20:37 +00003266 if (IsNonLocalValue(AddrModeInsts[i], MemoryInst->getParent())) {
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003267 AnyNonLocal = true;
3268 break;
3269 }
3270 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003271
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003272 // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything.
3273 if (!AnyNonLocal) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00003274 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found local addrmode: " << AddrMode << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003275 return false;
3276 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003277
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003278 // Insert this computation right after this user. Since our caller is
3279 // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are
3280 // guaranteed to happen later.
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003281 IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003282
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003283 // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know
3284 // that we have to sink it into this block. Check to see if we have already
3285 // done this for some other load/store instr in this block. If so, reuse the
3286 // computation.
3287 Value *&SunkAddr = SunkAddrs[Addr];
3288 if (SunkAddr) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00003289 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00003290 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003291 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
Benjamin Kramer547b6c52011-09-27 20:39:19 +00003292 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateBitCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
Eric Christopherfccff372015-01-27 01:01:38 +00003293 } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs ||
3294 (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM &&
Eric Christopher2c635492015-01-27 07:54:39 +00003295 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*MemoryInst->getParent()->getParent())
3296 ->useAA())) {
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003297 // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This
3298 // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities.
3299 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00003300 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003301 Type *IntPtrTy = TLI->getDataLayout()->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003302 Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003303
3304 // First, find the pointer.
3305 if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
3306 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003307 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003308 }
3309
3310 if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
3311 // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a
3312 // pointer (both of which seem meaningless).
3313 if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1)
3314 return false;
3315
3316 ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
3317 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
3318 }
3319
3320 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
3321 if (ResultPtr)
3322 return false;
3323
3324 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV;
3325 }
3326
3327 // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher
3328 // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case,
3329 // use it here.
3330 if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) {
3331 ResultPtr =
3332 Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003333 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003334 } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) {
3335 ResultPtr =
3336 Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
3337 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
3338 }
3339
3340 if (!ResultPtr &&
3341 !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
3342 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
3343 } else if (!ResultPtr) {
3344 return false;
3345 } else {
3346 Type *I8PtrTy =
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00003347 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace());
3348 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty();
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003349
3350 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
3351 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
3352 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
3353 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
3354 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
3355 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
3356 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
3357 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
3358 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
3359
3360 ResultIndex = V;
3361 }
3362
3363 // Add the scale value.
3364 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
3365 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
3366 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
3367 // done.
3368 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
3369 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
3370 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
3371 } else {
3372 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
3373 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
3374 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
3375 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
3376 // do not match instead of extending it.
3377 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(ResultIndex);
3378 if (I && (ResultIndex != AddrMode.BaseReg))
3379 I->eraseFromParent();
3380 return false;
3381 }
3382
3383 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
3384 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
3385 "sunkaddr");
3386 if (ResultIndex)
3387 ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr");
3388 else
3389 ResultIndex = V;
3390 }
3391
3392 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
3393 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
3394 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
3395 if (ResultIndex) {
NAKAMURA Takumif51a34e2014-10-29 15:23:11 +00003396 // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with
3397 // SDAG consecutive load/store merging.
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003398 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
3399 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00003400 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003401 }
3402
3403 ResultIndex = V;
3404 }
3405
3406 if (!ResultIndex) {
3407 SunkAddr = ResultPtr;
3408 } else {
3409 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
3410 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00003411 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003412 }
3413
3414 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
3415 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateBitCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
3416 }
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003417 } else {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00003418 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00003419 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Matt Arsenault37d42ec2013-09-06 00:18:43 +00003420 Type *IntPtrTy = TLI->getDataLayout()->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003421 Value *Result = nullptr;
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00003422
3423 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
3424 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
3425 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
3426 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
3427 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
3428 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
3429 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00003430 if (V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003431 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00003432 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003433 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00003434 Result = V;
3435 }
3436
3437 // Add the scale value.
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003438 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
3439 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
3440 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
3441 // done.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00003442 } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003443 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003444 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
3445 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003446 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003447 } else {
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00003448 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
3449 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
3450 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
3451 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
3452 // do not match instead of extending it.
Joey Gouly12a8bf02014-05-13 15:42:45 +00003453 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result);
Jim Grosbach83b44e12014-04-10 00:27:45 +00003454 if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg))
3455 I->eraseFromParent();
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00003456 return false;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003457 }
3458 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003459 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
3460 "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003461 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003462 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003463 else
3464 Result = V;
3465 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003466
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003467 // Add in the BaseGV if present.
3468 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003469 Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003470 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003471 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003472 else
3473 Result = V;
3474 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003475
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003476 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
3477 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
Owen Andersonedb4a702009-07-24 23:12:02 +00003478 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003479 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003480 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003481 else
3482 Result = V;
3483 }
3484
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003485 if (!Result)
Owen Anderson5a1acd92009-07-31 20:28:14 +00003486 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003487 else
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003488 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003489 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003490
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003491 MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003492
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00003493 // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions
3494 // using it.
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003495 if (Repl->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00003496 // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator.
3497 // Use a WeakVH to hold onto it in case this happens.
3498 WeakVH IterHandle(CurInstIterator);
3499 BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003500
Benjamin Kramer8bcc9712012-08-29 15:32:21 +00003501 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo);
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00003502
3503 if (IterHandle != CurInstIterator) {
3504 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
3505 // start of the block.
3506 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
3507 SunkAddrs.clear();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003508 }
Dale Johannesenb67a6e662010-03-31 20:37:15 +00003509 }
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00003510 ++NumMemoryInsts;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003511 return true;
3512}
3513
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003514/// OptimizeInlineAsmInst - If there are any memory operands, use
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00003515/// OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their address computing into the block when
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003516/// possible / profitable.
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00003517bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) {
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003518 bool MadeChange = false;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003519
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003520 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI =
3521 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getParent()->getParent())->getRegisterInfo();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003522 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003523 TargetConstraints = TLI->ParseConstraints(TRI, CS);
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00003524 unsigned ArgNo = 0;
John Thompson1094c802010-09-13 18:15:37 +00003525 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3526 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003527
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003528 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Dale Johannesence97d552010-06-25 21:55:36 +00003529 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003530
Eli Friedman666bbe32008-02-26 18:37:49 +00003531 if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory &&
3532 OpInfo.isIndirect) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00003533 Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++);
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00003534 MadeChange |= OptimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType());
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00003535 } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput)
3536 ArgNo++;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003537 }
3538
3539 return MadeChange;
3540}
3541
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003542/// \brief Check if all the uses of \p Inst are equivalent (or free) zero or
3543/// sign extensions.
3544static bool hasSameExtUse(Instruction *Inst, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3545 assert(!Inst->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use");
3546 const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
3547 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser);
3548 Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType();
3549 for (const User *U : Inst->users()) {
3550 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
3551 if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI)))
3552 return false;
3553 Type *CurTy = UI->getType();
3554 // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE.
3555 if (CurTy == ExtTy)
3556 continue;
3557
3558 // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation:
3559 // a = Inst
3560 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
3561 // c = sext ty1 a to ty3
3562 // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into:
3563 // a = Inst
3564 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
3565 // c = sext ty2 b to ty3
3566 // However, the last sext is not free.
3567 if (IsSExt)
3568 return false;
3569
3570 // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another.
3571 // In that case, we would not account for a different use.
3572 Type *NarrowTy;
3573 Type *LargeTy;
3574 if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
3575 CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) {
3576 NarrowTy = CurTy;
3577 LargeTy = ExtTy;
3578 } else {
3579 NarrowTy = ExtTy;
3580 LargeTy = CurTy;
3581 }
3582
3583 if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy))
3584 return false;
3585 }
3586 // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free.
3587 return true;
3588}
3589
3590/// \brief Try to form ExtLd by promoting \p Exts until they reach a
3591/// load instruction.
3592/// If an ext(load) can be formed, it is returned via \p LI for the load
3593/// and \p Inst for the extension.
3594/// Otherwise LI == nullptr and Inst == nullptr.
3595/// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to
3596/// revert them.
3597///
3598/// \return true when promoting was necessary to expose the ext(load)
3599/// opportunity, false otherwise.
3600///
3601/// Example:
3602/// \code
3603/// %ld = load i32* %addr
3604/// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4
3605/// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64
3606/// \endcode
3607/// =>
3608/// \code
3609/// %ld = load i32* %addr
3610/// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64
3611/// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4
3612/// \encode
3613/// Thanks to the promotion, we can match zext(load i32*) to i64.
3614bool CodeGenPrepare::ExtLdPromotion(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3615 LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst,
3616 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003617 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003618 // Iterate over all the extensions to see if one form an ext(load).
3619 for (auto I : Exts) {
3620 // Check if we directly have ext(load).
3621 if ((LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0)))) {
3622 Inst = I;
3623 // No promotion happened here.
3624 return false;
3625 }
3626 // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion.
3627 if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion)
3628 continue;
3629 // Get the action to perform the promotion.
3630 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = TypePromotionHelper::getAction(
3631 I, InsertedTruncsSet, *TLI, PromotedInsts);
3632 // Check if we can promote.
3633 if (!TPH)
3634 continue;
3635 // Save the current state.
3636 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3637 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3638 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003639 unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0;
3640 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003641 // Promote.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003642 Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost,
3643 &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003644 assert(PromotedVal &&
3645 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
3646
3647 // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load.
3648 // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically
3649 // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality.
3650 // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge
3651 // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going,
3652 // because the new extension may be removed too.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003653 long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost;
3654 TotalCreatedInstsCost -= ExtCost;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003655 if (!StressExtLdPromotion &&
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003656 (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 ||
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003657 !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, PromotedVal))) {
3658 // The promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state.
3659 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3660 continue;
3661 }
3662 // The promotion is profitable.
3663 // Check if it exposes an ext(load).
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003664 (void)ExtLdPromotion(TPT, LI, Inst, NewExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost);
3665 if (LI && (StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost ||
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003666 // If we have created a new extension, i.e., now we have two
3667 // extensions. We must make sure one of them is merged with
3668 // the load, otherwise we may degrade the code quality.
3669 (LI->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(LI, *TLI))))
3670 // Promotion happened.
3671 return true;
3672 // If this does not help to expose an ext(load) then, rollback.
3673 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3674 }
3675 // None of the extension can form an ext(load).
3676 LI = nullptr;
3677 Inst = nullptr;
3678 return false;
3679}
3680
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003681/// MoveExtToFormExtLoad - Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same
3682/// basic block as the load, unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows
3683/// SelectionDAG to fold the extend into the load.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003684/// \p I[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some
3685/// promotions apply.
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003686///
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003687bool CodeGenPrepare::MoveExtToFormExtLoad(Instruction *&I) {
3688 // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form
3689 // an extended load.
3690 TypePromotionTransaction TPT;
3691 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3692 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3693 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
3694 Exts.push_back(I);
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003695 // Look for a load being extended.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003696 LoadInst *LI = nullptr;
3697 Instruction *OldExt = I;
3698 bool HasPromoted = ExtLdPromotion(TPT, LI, I, Exts);
3699 if (!LI || !I) {
3700 assert(!HasPromoted && !LI && "If we did not match any load instruction "
3701 "the code must remain the same");
3702 I = OldExt;
3703 return false;
3704 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003705
3706 // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003707 // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote.
3708 // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable.
3709 if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == I->getParent())
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003710 return false;
3711
Ahmed Bougacha55e3c2d2014-12-05 18:04:40 +00003712 EVT VT = TLI->getValueType(I->getType());
3713 EVT LoadVT = TLI->getValueType(LI->getType());
3714
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003715 // If the load has other users and the truncate is not free, this probably
3716 // isn't worthwhile.
Ahmed Bougacha55e3c2d2014-12-05 18:04:40 +00003717 if (!LI->hasOneUse() && TLI &&
3718 (TLI->isTypeLegal(LoadVT) || !TLI->isTypeLegal(VT)) &&
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003719 !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), LI->getType())) {
3720 I = OldExt;
3721 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003722 return false;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003723 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003724
3725 // Check whether the target supports casts folded into loads.
3726 unsigned LType;
3727 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I))
3728 LType = ISD::ZEXTLOAD;
3729 else {
3730 assert(isa<SExtInst>(I) && "Unexpected ext type!");
3731 LType = ISD::SEXTLOAD;
3732 }
Ahmed Bougacha2b6917b2015-01-08 00:51:32 +00003733 if (TLI && !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(LType, VT, LoadVT)) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003734 I = OldExt;
3735 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003736 return false;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003737 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003738
3739 // Move the extend into the same block as the load, so that SelectionDAG
3740 // can fold it.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003741 TPT.commit();
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003742 I->removeFromParent();
3743 I->insertAfter(LI);
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00003744 ++NumExtsMoved;
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003745 return true;
3746}
3747
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003748bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) {
3749 BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent();
3750
Bob Wilsonff714f92010-09-21 21:44:14 +00003751 // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003752 // other uses of the source with result of extension.
3753 Value *Src = I->getOperand(0);
3754 if (Src->hasOneUse())
3755 return false;
3756
Evan Cheng2011df42007-12-13 07:50:36 +00003757 // Only do this xform if truncating is free.
Gabor Greifaa261722008-02-26 19:13:21 +00003758 if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType()))
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00003759 return false;
3760
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00003761 // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00003762 // this block.
3763 if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent())
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00003764 return false;
3765
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003766 bool DefIsLiveOut = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003767 for (User *U : I->users()) {
3768 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003769
3770 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003771 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003772 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3773 DefIsLiveOut = true;
3774 break;
3775 }
3776 if (!DefIsLiveOut)
3777 return false;
3778
Jim Grosbach0f38c1e2013-04-15 17:40:48 +00003779 // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003780 for (User *U : Src->users()) {
3781 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
3782 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00003783 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3784 // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing
3785 // reloads just before load / store instructions.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003786 if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI))
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00003787 return false;
3788 }
3789
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003790 // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once.
3791 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs;
3792
3793 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003794 for (Use &U : Src->uses()) {
3795 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003796
3797 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
3798 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
3799 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3800
3801 // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use.
3802 Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB];
3803
3804 if (!InsertedTrunc) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00003805 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003806 InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", InsertPt);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003807 InsertedTruncsSet.insert(InsertedTrunc);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003808 }
3809
3810 // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003811 U = InsertedTrunc;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00003812 ++NumExtUses;
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003813 MadeChange = true;
3814 }
3815
3816 return MadeChange;
3817}
3818
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003819/// isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable - Returns true if a SelectInst should be
3820/// turned into an explicit branch.
3821static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(SelectInst *SI) {
3822 // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine
3823 // whether a select is better represented as a branch. This requires that
3824 // branch probability metadata is preserved for the select, which is not the
3825 // case currently.
3826
3827 CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition());
3828
3829 // If the branch is predicted right, an out of order CPU can avoid blocking on
3830 // the compare. Emit cmovs on compares with a memory operand as branches to
3831 // avoid stalls on the load from memory. If the compare has more than one use
3832 // there's probably another cmov or setcc around so it's not worth emitting a
3833 // branch.
3834 if (!Cmp)
3835 return false;
3836
3837 Value *CmpOp0 = Cmp->getOperand(0);
3838 Value *CmpOp1 = Cmp->getOperand(1);
3839
3840 // We check that the memory operand has one use to avoid uses of the loaded
3841 // value directly after the compare, making branches unprofitable.
3842 return Cmp->hasOneUse() &&
3843 ((isa<LoadInst>(CmpOp0) && CmpOp0->hasOneUse()) ||
3844 (isa<LoadInst>(CmpOp1) && CmpOp1->hasOneUse()));
3845}
3846
3847
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00003848/// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction,
3849/// turn it into a branch.
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003850bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI) {
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00003851 bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1);
3852
3853 // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ?
3854 if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI || VectorCond)
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003855 return false;
3856
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00003857 TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind;
3858 if (VectorCond)
3859 SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect;
3860 else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy())
3861 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal;
3862 else
3863 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect;
3864
3865 // Do we have efficient codegen support for this kind of 'selects' ?
3866 if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind)) {
3867 // We have efficient codegen support for the select instruction.
3868 // Check if it is profitable to keep this 'select'.
3869 if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive() ||
3870 !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(SI))
3871 return false;
3872 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003873
3874 ModifiedDT = true;
3875
3876 // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks.
3877 BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent();
3878 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(SI));
3879 BasicBlock *NextBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end");
3880
3881 // Create a new block serving as the landing pad for the branch.
3882 BasicBlock *SmallBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.mid",
3883 NextBlock->getParent(), NextBlock);
3884
3885 // Move the unconditional branch from the block with the select in it into our
3886 // landing pad block.
3887 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3888 BranchInst::Create(NextBlock, SmallBlock);
3889
3890 // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition.
3891 BranchInst::Create(NextBlock, SmallBlock, SI->getCondition(), SI);
3892
3893 // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node.
3894 PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", NextBlock->begin());
3895 PN->takeName(SI);
3896 PN->addIncoming(SI->getTrueValue(), StartBlock);
3897 PN->addIncoming(SI->getFalseValue(), SmallBlock);
3898 SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
3899 SI->eraseFromParent();
3900
3901 // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block.
3902 CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end();
3903 ++NumSelectsExpanded;
3904 return true;
3905}
3906
Benjamin Kramer573ff362014-03-01 17:24:40 +00003907static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003908 SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask());
3909 int SplatElem = -1;
3910 for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) {
3911 if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem)
3912 return false;
3913 SplatElem = Mask[i];
3914 }
3915
3916 return true;
3917}
3918
3919/// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same
3920/// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases
3921/// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that
3922/// codegen can spot all lanes are identical.
3923bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
3924 BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent();
3925
3926 // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive.
3927 if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType()))
3928 return false;
3929
3930 // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a
3931 // constant splat.
3932 if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI))
3933 return false;
3934
3935 // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once.
3936 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles;
3937
3938 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003939 for (User *U : SVI->users()) {
3940 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003941
3942 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003943 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003944 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3945
3946 // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003947 if (!UI->isShift()) continue;
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003948
3949 // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't
3950 // already have a copy.
3951 Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB];
3952
3953 if (!InsertedShuffle) {
3954 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
3955 InsertedShuffle = new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0),
3956 SVI->getOperand(1),
3957 SVI->getOperand(2), "", InsertPt);
3958 }
3959
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003960 UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003961 MadeChange = true;
3962 }
3963
3964 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle.
3965 if (SVI->use_empty()) {
3966 SVI->eraseFromParent();
3967 MadeChange = true;
3968 }
3969
3970 return MadeChange;
3971}
3972
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00003973namespace {
3974/// \brief Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one.
3975/// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition.
3976/// E.g.,
3977/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
3978/// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0
3979/// c = scalar_op b
3980/// store c
3981///
3982/// =>
3983/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
3984/// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane)
3985/// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0
3986/// * store d
3987/// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the
3988/// transition.
3989class VectorPromoteHelper {
3990 /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations.
3991 const TargetLowering &TLI;
3992
3993 /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain.
3994 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
3995
3996 /// The transition being moved downwards.
3997 Instruction *Transition;
3998 /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted.
3999 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted;
4000 /// Cost of combining a store and an extract.
4001 unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost;
4002 /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition.
4003 Instruction *CombineInst;
4004
4005 /// \brief The instruction that represents the current end of the transition.
4006 /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain
4007 /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition.
4008 Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const {
4009 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty())
4010 return Transition;
4011 return InstsToBePromoted.back();
4012 }
4013
4014 /// \brief Return the index of the original value in the transition.
4015 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value,
4016 /// c, is at index 0.
4017 unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const {
4018 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
4019 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
4020 return 0;
4021 }
4022
4023 /// \brief Return the index of the index in the transition.
4024 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index
4025 /// is at index 1.
4026 unsigned getTransitionIdx() const {
4027 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
4028 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
4029 return 1;
4030 }
4031
4032 /// \brief Get the type of the transition.
4033 /// This is the type of the original value.
4034 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the
4035 /// transition is <2 x i32>.
4036 Type *getTransitionType() const {
4037 return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType();
4038 }
4039
4040 /// \brief Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through.
4041 /// I.e., we have the following sequence:
4042 /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2>
4043 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ...
4044 /// =>
4045 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ...
4046 /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2>
4047 void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted);
4048
4049 /// \brief Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the
4050 /// instructions enqueued to be promoted.
4051 bool isProfitableToPromote() {
4052 Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
4053 unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)
4054 ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue()
4055 : -1;
4056 Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType();
4057
4058 StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst);
4059 unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace();
4060 unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment();
4061 // Check if this store is supported.
4062 if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses(
Ahmed Bougacha026600d2014-11-12 23:05:03 +00004063 TLI.getValueType(ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS, Align)) {
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004064 // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine
4065 // the extract with the store.
4066 return false;
4067 }
4068
4069 // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition
4070 // scalar to vector.
4071 // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost.
4072 uint64_t ScalarCost =
4073 TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index);
4074 uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost;
4075 for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) {
4076 // Compute the cost.
4077 // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones.
4078 // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat
4079 // constant.
4080 Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0);
4081 bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) ||
4082 isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0);
4083 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK =
4084 IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
4085 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
4086 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK =
4087 !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
4088 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
4089 ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(
4090 Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
4091 VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType,
4092 Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
4093 }
4094 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: "
4095 << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n');
4096 return ScalarCost > VectorCost;
4097 }
4098
4099 /// \brief Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same
4100 /// number of elements as the transition.
4101 /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated
4102 /// accross the whole vector.
4103 /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>,
4104 /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible:
4105 /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only
4106 /// used at the index of the extract.
4107 Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const {
4108 unsigned ExtractIdx = UINT_MAX;
4109 if (!UseSplat) {
4110 // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to
4111 // use a splat constant.
4112 Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx());
4113 if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx))
4114 ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue();
4115 else
4116 UseSplat = true;
4117 }
4118
4119 unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements();
4120 if (UseSplat)
4121 return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val);
4122
4123 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec;
4124 UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType());
4125 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) {
4126 if (Idx == ExtractIdx)
4127 ConstVec.push_back(Val);
4128 else
4129 ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal);
4130 }
4131 return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec);
4132 }
4133
4134 /// \brief Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx
4135 /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior.
4136 static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use,
4137 unsigned OperandIdx) {
4138 // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on
4139 // the right hand side of a division-like instruction.
4140 if (OperandIdx != 1)
4141 return false;
4142 switch (Use->getOpcode()) {
4143 default:
4144 return false;
4145 case Instruction::SDiv:
4146 case Instruction::UDiv:
4147 case Instruction::SRem:
4148 case Instruction::URem:
4149 return true;
4150 case Instruction::FDiv:
4151 case Instruction::FRem:
4152 return !Use->hasNoNaNs();
4153 }
4154 llvm_unreachable(nullptr);
4155 }
4156
4157public:
4158 VectorPromoteHelper(const TargetLowering &TLI, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4159 Instruction *Transition, unsigned CombineCost)
4160 : TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition),
4161 StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost), CombineInst(nullptr) {
4162 assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null");
4163 }
4164
4165 /// \brief Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type.
4166 bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
4167 // We could support CastInst too.
4168 return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted);
4169 }
4170
4171 /// \brief Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted
4172 /// by moving downward the transition through.
4173 bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
4174 // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded.
4175 // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions.
4176 for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
4177 const Value *Val = U.get();
4178 if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) {
4179 // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs,
4180 // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a
4181 // division by zero.
4182 if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()))
4183 return false;
4184 continue;
4185 }
4186 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) &&
4187 !isa<ConstantFP>(Val))
4188 return false;
4189 }
4190 // Check that the resulting operation is legal.
4191 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode());
4192 if (!ISDOpcode)
4193 return false;
4194 return StressStoreExtract ||
Ahmed Bougacha026600d2014-11-12 23:05:03 +00004195 TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
4196 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(getTransitionType(), true));
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004197 }
4198
4199 /// \brief Check whether or not \p Use can be combined
4200 /// with the transition.
4201 /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse?
4202 bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); }
4203
4204 /// \brief Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted.
4205 void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
4206 InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted);
4207 }
4208
4209 /// \brief Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition.
4210 void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) {
4211 assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine");
4212 CombineInst = ToBeCombined;
4213 }
4214
4215 /// \brief Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is
4216 /// is profitable.
4217 /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise.
4218 bool promote() {
4219 // Check if there is something to promote.
4220 // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with,
4221 // we assume the promotion is not profitable.
4222 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst)
4223 return false;
4224
4225 // Check cost.
4226 if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote())
4227 return false;
4228
4229 // Promote.
4230 for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted)
4231 promoteImpl(ToBePromoted);
4232 InstsToBePromoted.clear();
4233 return true;
4234 }
4235};
4236} // End of anonymous namespace.
4237
4238void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
4239 // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def
4240 // can be statically promoted.
4241 // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted:
4242 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a
4243 // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2
4244 // Move the transition down.
4245 // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition.
4246 // = ... b => = ... Def.
4247 assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() &&
4248 "The type of the result of the transition does not match "
4249 "the final type");
4250 ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition);
4251 // 2. Update the type of the uses.
4252 // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def.
4253 Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType();
4254 ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy);
4255 // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted
4256 // operands.
4257 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a.
4258 for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
4259 Value *Val = U.get();
4260 Value *NewVal = nullptr;
4261 if (Val == Transition)
4262 NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
4263 else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) ||
4264 isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) {
4265 // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef.
4266 NewVal = getConstantVector(
4267 cast<Constant>(Val),
4268 isa<UndefValue>(Val) ||
4269 canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()));
4270 } else
Craig Topperd3c02f12015-01-05 10:15:49 +00004271 llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update "
4272 "this?");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004273 ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal);
4274 }
4275 Transition->removeFromParent();
4276 Transition->insertAfter(ToBePromoted);
4277 Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted);
4278}
4279
4280/// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction.
4281/// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target
4282/// has this feature and this is profitable.
4283bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) {
4284 unsigned CombineCost = UINT_MAX;
4285 if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI ||
4286 (!StressStoreExtract &&
4287 !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(),
4288 Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost)))
4289 return false;
4290
4291 // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition.
4292 // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until:
4293 // - We can combine the transition with its single use
4294 // => we got rid of the transition.
4295 // - We escape the current basic block
4296 // => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and
4297 // we do not do that for now.
4298 BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent();
4299 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n');
4300 VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost);
4301 // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be
4302 // beneficial.
4303 while (Inst->hasOneUse()) {
4304 Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
4305 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
4306
4307 if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) {
4308 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block ("
4309 << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName()
4310 << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName() << ").\n");
4311 return false;
4312 }
4313
4314 if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) {
4315 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n'
4316 << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
4317 VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted);
4318 bool Changed = VPH.promote();
4319 NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed;
4320 return Changed;
4321 }
4322
4323 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n");
4324 if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted))
4325 return false;
4326
4327 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n");
4328
4329 VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted);
4330 Inst = ToBePromoted;
4331 }
4332 return false;
4333}
4334
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00004335bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004336 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
4337 // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG)
4338 // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up. If we detect such a
4339 // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004340 const DataLayout &DL = I->getModule()->getDataLayout();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +00004341 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, DL, TLInfo, nullptr)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004342 P->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
4343 P->eraseFromParent();
4344 ++NumPHIsElim;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004345 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004346 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004347 return false;
4348 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004349
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004350 if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004351 // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have
4352 // already been constant folded. The only reason NOT to constant fold
4353 // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant
4354 // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist
4355 // the address of globals out of a loop). If this is the case, we don't
4356 // want to forward-subst the cast.
4357 if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0)))
4358 return false;
4359
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004360 if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI))
4361 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004362
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004363 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00004364 /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't
4365 /// fit in one register
4366 if (TLI && TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(),
4367 TLI->getValueType(CI->getType())) ==
4368 TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) {
4369 return SinkCast(CI);
4370 } else {
4371 bool MadeChange = MoveExtToFormExtLoad(I);
4372 return MadeChange | OptimizeExtUses(I);
4373 }
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004374 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004375 return false;
4376 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004377
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004378 if (CmpInst *CI = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
Hal Finkeldecb0242014-01-02 21:13:43 +00004379 if (!TLI || !TLI->hasMultipleConditionRegisters())
4380 return OptimizeCmpExpression(CI);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004381
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004382 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004383 if (TLI)
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004384 return OptimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType());
4385 return false;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004386 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004387
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004388 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004389 if (TLI)
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004390 return OptimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1),
4391 SI->getOperand(0)->getType());
4392 return false;
4393 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004394
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00004395 BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I);
4396
4397 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr ||
4398 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) {
4399 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1));
4400 if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn())
4401 return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI);
4402
4403 return false;
4404 }
4405
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004406 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00004407 if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) {
4408 /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast
4409 Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(),
4410 GEPI->getName(), GEPI);
4411 GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC);
4412 GEPI->eraseFromParent();
4413 ++NumGEPsElim;
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00004414 OptimizeInst(NC, ModifiedDT);
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004415 return true;
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00004416 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004417 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004418 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004419
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004420 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00004421 return OptimizeCallInst(CI, ModifiedDT);
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004422
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00004423 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I))
4424 return OptimizeSelectInst(SI);
4425
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00004426 if (ShuffleVectorInst *SVI = dyn_cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I))
4427 return OptimizeShuffleVectorInst(SVI);
4428
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004429 if (isa<ExtractElementInst>(I))
4430 return OptimizeExtractElementInst(I);
4431
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004432 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004433}
4434
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00004435// In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used
4436// across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time
4437// selection.
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00004438bool CodeGenPrepare::OptimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +00004439 SunkAddrs.clear();
Cameron Zwarich5dd2aa22011-03-02 03:31:46 +00004440 bool MadeChange = false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004441
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00004442 CurInstIterator = BB.begin();
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00004443 while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) {
4444 MadeChange |= OptimizeInst(CurInstIterator++, ModifiedDT);
4445 if (ModifiedDT)
4446 return true;
4447 }
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00004448 MadeChange |= DupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB);
4449
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00004450 return MadeChange;
4451}
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004452
4453// llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004454// handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004455// find a node corresponding to the value.
4456bool CodeGenPrepare::PlaceDbgValues(Function &F) {
4457 bool MadeChange = false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00004458 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004459 Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00004460 for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe90f1162015-01-08 21:07:55 +00004461 Instruction *Insn = BI++;
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004462 DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn);
Adrian Prantl32da8892014-04-25 20:49:25 +00004463 // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These
4464 // instrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca)
4465 // being taken. They should not be moved next to the alloca
4466 // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to
4467 // where said address is used.
4468 if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) {
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004469 PrevNonDbgInst = Insn;
4470 continue;
4471 }
4472
4473 Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue());
4474 if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) {
4475 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n" << *DVI << ' ' << *VI);
4476 DVI->removeFromParent();
4477 if (isa<PHINode>(VI))
4478 DVI->insertBefore(VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt());
4479 else
4480 DVI->insertAfter(VI);
4481 MadeChange = true;
4482 ++NumDbgValueMoved;
4483 }
4484 }
4485 }
4486 return MadeChange;
4487}
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +00004488
4489// If there is a sequence that branches based on comparing a single bit
4490// against zero that can be combined into a single instruction, and the
4491// target supports folding these into a single instruction, sink the
4492// mask and compare into the branch uses. Do this before OptimizeBlock ->
4493// OptimizeInst -> OptimizeCmpExpression, which perturbs the pattern being
4494// searched for.
4495bool CodeGenPrepare::sinkAndCmp(Function &F) {
4496 if (!EnableAndCmpSinking)
4497 return false;
4498 if (!TLI || !TLI->isMaskAndBranchFoldingLegal())
4499 return false;
4500 bool MadeChange = false;
4501 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(), E = F.end(); I != E; ) {
4502 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
4503
4504 // Does this BB end with the following?
4505 // %andVal = and %val, #single-bit-set
4506 // %icmpVal = icmp %andResult, 0
4507 // br i1 %cmpVal label %dest1, label %dest2"
4508 BranchInst *Brcc = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4509 if (!Brcc || !Brcc->isConditional())
4510 continue;
4511 ICmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(Brcc->getOperand(0));
4512 if (!Cmp || Cmp->getParent() != BB)
4513 continue;
4514 ConstantInt *Zero = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Cmp->getOperand(1));
4515 if (!Zero || !Zero->isZero())
4516 continue;
4517 Instruction *And = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cmp->getOperand(0));
4518 if (!And || And->getOpcode() != Instruction::And || And->getParent() != BB)
4519 continue;
4520 ConstantInt* Mask = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1));
4521 if (!Mask || !Mask->getUniqueInteger().isPowerOf2())
4522 continue;
4523 DEBUG(dbgs() << "found and; icmp ?,0; brcc\n"); DEBUG(BB->dump());
4524
4525 // Push the "and; icmp" for any users that are conditional branches.
4526 // Since there can only be one branch use per BB, we don't need to keep
4527 // track of which BBs we insert into.
4528 for (Value::use_iterator UI = Cmp->use_begin(), E = Cmp->use_end();
4529 UI != E; ) {
4530 Use &TheUse = *UI;
4531 // Find brcc use.
4532 BranchInst *BrccUser = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(*UI);
4533 ++UI;
4534 if (!BrccUser || !BrccUser->isConditional())
4535 continue;
4536 BasicBlock *UserBB = BrccUser->getParent();
4537 if (UserBB == BB) continue;
4538 DEBUG(dbgs() << "found Brcc use\n");
4539
4540 // Sink the "and; icmp" to use.
4541 MadeChange = true;
4542 BinaryOperator *NewAnd =
4543 BinaryOperator::CreateAnd(And->getOperand(0), And->getOperand(1), "",
4544 BrccUser);
4545 CmpInst *NewCmp =
4546 CmpInst::Create(Cmp->getOpcode(), Cmp->getPredicate(), NewAnd, Zero,
4547 "", BrccUser);
4548 TheUse = NewCmp;
4549 ++NumAndCmpsMoved;
4550 DEBUG(BrccUser->getParent()->dump());
4551 }
4552 }
4553 return MadeChange;
4554}
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004555
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004556/// \brief Retrieve the probabilities of a conditional branch. Returns true on
4557/// success, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was found.
4558static bool extractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
4559 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
4560 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
4561 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
4562 auto *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
4563 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3)
4564 return false;
4565
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00004566 const auto *CITrue =
4567 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
4568 const auto *CIFalse =
4569 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004570 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse)
4571 return false;
4572
4573 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
4574 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
4575
4576 return true;
4577}
4578
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004579/// \brief Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t.
4580static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) {
4581 uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse;
4582 uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / UINT32_MAX) + 1;
4583 NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale;
4584 NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale;
4585}
4586
4587/// \brief Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like:
4588/// \code
4589/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
4590/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
4591/// %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1
4592/// br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
4593/// \endcode
4594/// into multiple branch instructions like:
4595/// \code
4596/// bb1:
4597/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
4598/// br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2
4599/// bb2:
4600/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
4601/// br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
4602/// \endcode
4603/// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations
4604/// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is
4605/// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions.
4606///
4607/// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG.
4608///
4609bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F) {
David Blaikiedc3f01e2015-03-09 01:57:13 +00004610 if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive())
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004611 return false;
4612
4613 bool MadeChange = false;
4614 for (auto &BB : F) {
4615 // Does this BB end with the following?
4616 // %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
4617 // %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
4618 // %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2
4619 // br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2"
4620 BinaryOperator *LogicOp;
4621 BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB;
4622 if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB)))
4623 continue;
4624
4625 unsigned Opc;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004626 Value *Cond1, *Cond2;
4627 if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
4628 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004629 Opc = Instruction::And;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004630 else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
4631 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004632 Opc = Instruction::Or;
4633 else
4634 continue;
4635
4636 if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ||
4637 !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) )
4638 continue;
4639
4640 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump());
4641
4642 // Create a new BB.
4643 auto *InsertBefore = std::next(Function::iterator(BB))
4644 .getNodePtrUnchecked();
4645 auto TmpBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(),
4646 BB.getName() + ".cond.split",
4647 BB.getParent(), InsertBefore);
4648
4649 // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the
4650 // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction.
4651 auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator());
4652 Br1->setCondition(Cond1);
4653 LogicOp->eraseFromParent();
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004654
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004655 // Depending on the conditon we have to either replace the true or the false
4656 // successor of the original branch instruction.
4657 if (Opc == Instruction::And)
4658 Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB);
4659 else
4660 Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB);
4661
4662 // Fill in the new basic block.
4663 auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB);
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004664 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) {
4665 I->removeFromParent();
4666 I->insertBefore(Br2);
4667 }
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004668
4669 // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be
4670 // replaced in one succesor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from
4671 // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one
4672 // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target
4673 // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition
4674 // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that
4675 // we perfrom the correct update for the PHI nodes.
4676 // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch
4677 // instruction (or any other instruction).
4678 if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
4679 std::swap(TBB, FBB);
4680
4681 // Replace the old BB with the new BB.
4682 for (auto &I : *TBB) {
4683 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
4684 if (!PN)
4685 break;
4686 int i;
4687 while ((i = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0)
4688 PN->setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB);
4689 }
4690
4691 // Add another incoming edge form the new BB.
4692 for (auto &I : *FBB) {
4693 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
4694 if (!PN)
4695 break;
4696 auto *Val = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB);
4697 PN->addIncoming(Val, TmpBB);
4698 }
4699
4700 // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder::
4701 // FindMergedConditions).
4702 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) {
4703 // Codegen X | Y as:
4704 // BB1:
4705 // jmp_if_X TBB
4706 // jmp TmpBB
4707 // TmpBB:
4708 // jmp_if_Y TBB
4709 // jmp FBB
4710 //
4711
4712 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB.
4713 // The requirement is that
4714 // TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB)
4715 // = TrueProb for orignal BB.
4716 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
4717 // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice
4718 // assumes that
4719 // TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB.
4720 // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for
4721 // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated.
4722 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004723 if (extractBranchMetadata(Br1, TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004724 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
4725 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight;
4726 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4727 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
4728 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4729
4730 NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
4731 NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight;
4732 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4733 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
4734 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4735 }
4736 } else {
4737 // Codegen X & Y as:
4738 // BB1:
4739 // jmp_if_X TmpBB
4740 // jmp FBB
4741 // TmpBB:
4742 // jmp_if_Y TBB
4743 // jmp FBB
4744 //
4745 // This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB.
4746
4747 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB.
4748 // The requirement is that
4749 // FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB)
4750 // = FalseProb for orignal BB.
4751 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
4752 // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice
4753 // assumes that
4754 // FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB.
4755 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004756 if (extractBranchMetadata(Br1, TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004757 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
4758 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
4759 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4760 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
4761 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4762
4763 NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight;
4764 NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
4765 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4766 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
4767 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4768 }
4769 }
4770
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004771 // Note: No point in getting fancy here, since the DT info is never
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +00004772 // available to CodeGenPrepare.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004773 ModifiedDT = true;
4774
4775 MadeChange = true;
4776
4777 DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump();
4778 TmpBB->dump());
4779 }
4780 return MadeChange;
4781}